ThinLine Horizontal Fan Coil

Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1152-3
Group: Fan Coil
Part Number: 910175957
Date: May 2016
ThinLine Horizontal Fan Coils and
Cabinet Unit Heaters
Type FC and FH
Exposed Horizontal Cabinet Fan Coil
Recessed Horizontal Cabinet Fan Coil
Concealed Horizontal Unit Heater
Concealed Horizontal Fan Coil
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Controls and Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Digital Thermostats
Receiving and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
T180 Programmable Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pre-Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MicroTech III Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Uncrating and Inspecting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Recommended Maintenance Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 8
Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Duct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Valve and Piping Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Ductwork Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Factory-Installed Valve and Piping Packages . . . . . 37
External Insulating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Control Valve Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Piping Connection Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chilled Water Pipe Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Model Number Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Field-Installed Valve & Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Addendum IM 1014 — MT155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Steam Piping Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Two-Pipe Systems with Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Addendum IM 1015 — MT158 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Addendum IM 1016 — MT158 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Addendum IM 1017 — MT168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Condensate Overflow Detection Device . . . . . . . . . 14
Addendum IM 846 — MT170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Decorative Trim Flange for Partially-Recessed Units 14
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electric Heat Over-Temp Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . 14
Addendum IM 1171
— Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor . . . . . . . . . 103
Initial Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cleaning & Flushing the Water System . . . . . . . . . . 15
Venting Hydronic Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Equipment Start Up Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Addendum IM 831
— Thermostat Conversion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Addendum IM 763
— Automatic Changeover Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Addendum OM 1111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monthly Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS2
www.DaikinApplied.com
Introduction
Daikin Thinline Horizontal Fan Coils are intended for use in
single zone applications. They are available in sizes from 200
to 1200 cfm. Figure 2 describes the main features of these
units and can be referred to for component placement. These
units are available in two-pipe configurations with one hydronic
coil, with or without electric heat.
Introduction
They are also available in four-pipe configurations with a
primary coil and a secondary reheat or preheat coil. A variety
of factory-built piping packages are available, either factory or
field-installed. Units are available with a variety of thermostat
and fan speed control options, including the MicroTech® III
controller board.
Figure 1: Nomenclature (see Table 3 page 49 through page 53 for complete model number description)
FC H C – 2 02 A
Unit Type
FC = Fan Coil
FH = Cabinet Unit Heater
Voltage
A = 115/60/1
E = 208-230/60/1
J = 277-265/60/1
Unit Configuration
H= Horizontal
Unit Size
02 = 200 CFM
03 = 300 CFM
04 = 400 CFM
06 = 600 CFM
08 = 800 CFM
10 = 1000 CFM
12 = 1200 CFM
Cabinet Type
C = Cabinet
R = Recessed
H = Hideaway
Design Series
Figure 2: Model FCHH with Return Plenum
Return Plenum
Primary Coil
(Chilled Water Cooling)
2-, 3- or 4-row
Drain Pain
Galvanized or Stainless Steel
Secondary Coil
(Hot Water or Steam Heating)
Standard or High Capacity
www.DaikinApplied.com
3
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Introduction
Safety
Operating Limits
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.
Use a quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have a fire
extinguisher available. Follow all warnings and cautions in
these instructions and attached to the unit. Consult applicable
local building codes and National Electrical Codes (NEC) for
special requirements.
This equipment is designed for indoor installation only.
Sheltered locations such as attics, garages, etc., generally
will not provide sufficient protection against extremes in
temperature and/or humidity, and equipment performance,
reliability, and service life may be adversely affected.
Recognize safety information. When you see a safety symbol
on the unit or in these instructions, be alert to the potential
for personal injury. Understand the meanings of the words
DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION.
• DANGER identifies the most serious hazards that will
result in death or severe personal injury;
• WARNING means the hazards can result in death or
severe personal injury;
• CAUTION identifies unsafe practices that can result in
personal injury or product and property damage.
Improper installation, adjustment, service, maintenance, or use
can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions
which may result in personal injury or property damage.
This product must be installed only by personnel with the
training, experience, skills, and applicable licensing that makes
him/her “a qualified professional HVACR installer.”
DANGER
Disconnect all electrical power before servicing unit. Electrical
shock will cause severe injury or death.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Use copper conductors only. Unit terminals are not designed
to accept other types of conductors. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the equipment.
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Wear protective gloves to avoid
possible cuts and abrasions from exposed edges. Avoid
contact with sharp edges
CAUTION
Cleaning agents may cause serious damage to internal
components, such as aluminum coils and electronic controls,
etc. Do not operate fan coil while building maintenance
cleaning agents are in use.
CAUTION
Sharp edges and coil surfaces are injury hazards. Avoid
contact with them.
CAUTION
Moving machinery and electrical power hazards may cause
severe personal injury or death. Disconnect and lock off
power before servicing equipment.
NOTICE
Installation and maintenance are to be performed only by
qualified personnel who are familiar with and in compliance
with state, local and national codes and regulations, and
experienced with this type of equipment.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS4
www.DaikinApplied.com
Introduction
Receiving and Storage
Pre-Installation Notes
Upon receipt of the equipment, check carton for visible
damage. Make a notation on the shipper’s delivery ticket
before signing. If there is any evidence of rough handling,
immediately open the cartons to check for concealed damage.
If any damage is found, notify the carrier within 48 hours to
establish your claim and request their inspection and a report.
The Warranty Claims Department should then be contacted.
Installation and maintenance are to be performed only by
qualified personnel who are familiar with and in compliance
with state, local and national codes and regulations, and
experienced with this type of equipment. Before beginning
installation, please read this publication in its entirety.
Directions given in this bulletin for right and left sides or coil
hand assume a position facing the front (discharge) of the unit.
Do not stand or transport the machines on end. For storing,
each carton is marked with “up” arrows.
Temporary storage at the job site must be indoors, completely
sheltered from rain, snow, etc. High or low temperatures
naturally associated with weather patterns will not harm the
units. Excessively high temperatures, 140°F (60°C) and
higher, may deteriorate certain plastic materials and cause
permanent damage.
IMPORTANT
This product was carefully packed and thoroughly inspected
before leaving the factory. Responsibility for its safe delivery
was assumed by the carrier upon acceptance of the shipment.
Claims for loss or damage sustained in transit must therefore
be made upon the carrier as follows:
VISIBLE LOSS OR DAMAGE
Any external evidence of loss or damage must be noted on
the freight bill or carrier’s receipt, and signed by the carrier’s
agent. Failure to adequately describe such external evidence
of loss or damage may result in the carrier’s refusal to honor
a damage claim. The form required to file such a claim will be
supplied by the carrier.
2. Inspect the carton for any specific tagging numbers
indicated by the factory per a request from the installing
contractor. At this time the voltage, phase and capacity
should be checked against the plans.
3. Check the packing list and unit identification/tagging
numbers against the plans to verify that the unit is being
installed in the correct location. The unit data plate is
attached to the front of the control box (see Figure 3).
Remove the bottom panel on cabinet units to access
it. The panel contains specific information on standard
components as listed in Figure 1 on page 3 and
starting in Table 3 on page 49.
4. Before installation, check the available dimensions of
the space where the unit is to be installed against the
dimensions of the unit.
5. Note the location and routing of water piping, condensate
drain piping, and electrical wiring. The locations of these
items should be clearly marked on submittal drawings.
CONCEALED LOSS OR DAMAGE
Concealed loss or damage means loss or damage which
does not become apparent until the product has been
unpacked. The contents may be damaged in transit due to
rough handling even though the carton may not show external
damages. When the damage is discovered upon unpacking,
make a written request for inspection by the carrier’s agent
within fifteen (15) days of the delivery date and file a claim
with the carrier
www.DaikinApplied.com
1. To prevent damage, do not operate this equipment
for supplementary heating and cooling during the
construction period. Doing so will void the warranty.
6. An installing contractor may find it beneficial to confer
with piping, sheet metal, and electrical foremen before
installing any unit.
NOTE: Check the unit data plate for correct voltage with the
plans before installing the equipment. Also, make
sure all electrical ground connections are made in
accordance with local code.
5
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Introduction
7. After installation, cover the unit with the shipping carton
or other appropriate material for protection during
finishing of the building. This is critical while spraying
fireproofing material on ceiling beams, bar joists,
sandblasting, spray painting and plastering. Damage to
the unit due to a failure to protect it during finishing of the
building is not covered by the warranty.
8. Maximum entering water temperature is 200°F (93°C).
Figure 3: Data Plate Location
9. Air ducts, when used with hideaway units, should be
installed in accordance with local and national codes,
including National Fire Protection Association standards
for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems and the National Fire Protection Association
standards for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems other than Residence Type.
10. Completed installation of hideaway units without return
plenum must comply with the requirements of NFPA90B
with regard to the use of concealed ceiling spaces as
return air plenums.
11. When a return air duct is not provided, applicable codes
may limit installation to single story buildings.
12. A one-inch duct collar is provided on units with a ducted
return and/or discharge to attach ductwork. Daikin
recommends using galvanized sheet metal ductwork.
Slide the sheetmetal duct over the duct collar flange of
the unit, seal the joint and fasten with sheetmetal screws.
13. Vibration isolators are generally not needed, if required
by local codes, they must be provided by the installing
contractor.
14. Valve and Piping Packages supplied with the unit
should be supported during the installation process. It is
advisable to keep the support in place after the unit has
been installed and started.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS6
www.DaikinApplied.com
Installation
Installation
Uncrating and Inspecting the Unit
Installation
1. Consult job blueprints for unit location.
WARNING
2. Clean area where unit is to be installed, removing all
construction dirt and debris.
Plastic packaging is a suffocation hazard, dispose of properly.
Keep away from children.
3. Remove the unit from the shipping carton and plastic
covering. Save the carton and plastic to use as a
protective cover after the installation is complete.
1. Carefully remove the packaging, remaining alert to any
signs of shipping damage. Be careful not to discard
components that may be included with the packaging.
4. Rotate fan wheels by hand to make sure the wheels
rotate freely.
2. If the unit is damaged, file a claim with the carrier. Notify
the local Daikin representative immediately.
5. Unit is ready for installation. See Duct Connections for
more detail.
3. You may want to retain some or all of the packaging to
provide jobsite unit location information and temporary
protection for the fan coil after installation. Be sure to
dispose of plastic packaging and protective cardboard
properly, in accordance with local recycling rules and
guidelines.
6. Secure unit in proper position. The top of the unit must
be level. If hanger rods are used, “back-up” nuts should
be put on the rods to prevent the mounting nuts from
loosening. The drain pan is designed to have a little
gradient to ensure proper drainage and operation. Do not
level Drain Pan.
4. Touch up painted panels if necessary. If panels need
paint, sanding is not necessary. However, clean the
surface of any oil, grease, or dirt residue so the paint will
adhere. Purchase factory approved touch up paint from
your Daikin representative or Daikin Service.
7. Water and drain connections can now be made to
the unit. Piping must be installed in accordance with
local codes and regulations. See Piping Connection
Recommendations for more detail.
8. Vent the coils.
9. All water and drain lines should be well insulated to
prevent sweating and heat loss. See External Insulating
Requirements for more detail Electrical connections can
now be made to the electrical panel or chase, in case the
panel is not provided. Unless it is a special-order unit,
all electrical connections are made in the main electrical
control panel located on the opposite side of the primary
panel connections. Electrical power wiring goes through
the chase located between the drain pan and coil
section. If needed the power connections may be done
through knockouts located on both sides of the unit. See
Figure 4.
Figure 4: Electrical Knockouts (Typical)
www.DaikinApplied.com
7
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Installation
10. The installer shall provide wiring to the unit. Branch
circuit overcurrent protection and disconnect should
conform to the applicable electrical codes. The motor
provided is “thermally protected.” See Electrical
Connections on page 13.
11. All panels and doors should be in place and closed
before starting up the unit.
12. During summer construction, there is an unusually
high amount of moisture in the air; therefore, the
initial pulldown should be very gradual (high speed for
maximum airflow with reduced GPM and elevated chilled
water temperature for reduced capacity). This procedure
will reduce the possibility of the unit sweating.
Recommended Maintenance
Clearance
Cabinet units have removable bottom and side panels for easy
access to components for service and maintenance. The fan
assembly and main drain pan are easily removable from the
bottom for cleaning. See Accessing/Removing the Main Fan
Deck and Motor Assembly on page 20 for more information.
Figure 5 shows recommended maintenance clearances for
hideaway units. For exposed units use: 24 inches [61 cm]
on either side (A and B) and 18 inches [46 cm] (C) below for
bottom panel removal. Units are referred to as either right-hand
or left-hand depending upon the piping connection. Hand is
designated by facing the front of the unit (airflow discharges
from the front or bottom).
Duct Connections
Air ducts, when used with hideaway units, should be installed
in accordance with local and national codes, including
National Fire Protection Association standards for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems and
the National Fire Protection Association standards for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems other
than Residence Type.
A one-inch duct collar is provided on units with a ducted return
and/or discharge to attach ductwork. Daikin recommends using
galvanized sheet metal ductwork. Slide the sheetmetal duct
over the duct collar flange of the unit, seal the joint and fasten
with sheetmetal screws.
Ductwork Recommendations
Follow the general recommendations listed below when
installing the ductwork for the unit.
1. Air ducts should be made of galvanized steel and
connected to the flange of the unit with a canvas
connector. Insert the duct into the flange and fix
with screws. Duct connections must be installed in
accordance with national and local codes.
2. Discharge ductwork should run in a straight line,
unchanged in size or direction, for a minimum distance
of three fan diameters from the unit (approximately 20
inches).
3. Avoid making sharp turns when making duct turns and
transitions. Use proportional splits, turning vanes, and air
scoops when necessary.
4. When possible, construct and orient supply ductwork
turns in the same direction as the fan rotation.
External Insulating Requirements
Insulate and vapor-seal surfaces that are colder than the
surrounding air dew point to prevent unplanned condensation.
Daikin recommends field-insulation in the following areas to
prevent potential condensate problems:
• Supply and return water piping connections
• Condensate drain lines and connections
• Fresh air intake duct connections
• Discharge duct connections
• Wall boxes
Figure 5: Concealed Hideaway Unit Clearance
D
Opposite Wall
Back Wall
B
Coil Connection Wall
Ceiling
C
A
A = 8" (same side connection) or 24" (opposite side)
B=24"
C=3"
D = 18" for Hideaway units without plenum
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS8
www.DaikinApplied.com
Installation
Piping Connection Recommendations
General Guidelines
• The piping to and from the unit must be protected from
outside air and freeze conditions. It must be suitably
insulated for condensation and for heat loss or gain.
Penetrations entering the unit end compartments must be
fitted/sealed for unit integrity.
IMPORTANT
Venting is required on the return piping for secondary preheat
or reheat coils. It is included on factory-built piping packages,
but must be added by the installing contractor for field-installed
piping. See Figure 7
• Exterior condensate may be an issue if field piping does
not have a control valve. Review the supply and return
header locations in the dimensions drawings. If using a
field-assembled piping package, allow sufficient room to
install the secondary drain pan. Uninsulated piping for
chilled water should not extend over the edges of the
secondary condensate drain pan.
WARNING
Avoid overheating when soldering field connections
to the coil to prevent leakage, overheating of the
copper tubes, and melting of valves, factory-soldered
joints or component gasketing. A quenching cloth is
recommended. See Figure 6.
• Piping can be steel, copper or PVC, but must comply with
local codes.
• Proper ventilation is required for soldering. When
soldering, use a quenching cloth to protect fan coil
components from overheating damage—melting
insulation, also damage to valves, wiring, electronics,
sensors, etc. See Figure 6. When Daikin provides valve
packages with unions, o-rings are included. When
soldering near unions, remove the o-rings before heating.
Figure 6: Protect Components from Overheating
• Supply and return shutoff valves are recommended at
each unit. The return valve is used for balancing and
should have a “memory stop” so that it can always be
closed off, but can only be re-opened to the proper
position for the flow required.
• Primary coils are factory-equipped with vents for venting
the system, but secondary coils (preheat or reheat) are
not. If the unit is not equipped with factory-built piping
packages which includes a secondary coil air vent, then
vents must be added. See Figure 7.
• Be sure to install control valves on the correct fan coil.
Indiscriminate mixing of valves in the field can result in
valves improperly sized for the desired flow rate, which
can result in poor operation and coil freezes.
• Install control valves so there is at least 2" (51mm)
minimum clearance to remove the actuator from the
valve body.
Figure 7: Secondary Coil Air Vent
• If sealant compound is not provided for flexible hose
fittings, apply Teflon tape to the connections to help
prevent leaks.
• Do not connect a unit to the supply and return piping
until the water system has been cleaned and flushed
completely. After this is done, the initial connection should
have all valves wide open in preparation for water system
flushing.
• Ensure proper insulation of supply and return piping.
Proper insulation prevents loss of fan coil capacity,
overheating of end compartments, and/or moisture
dripping.
• Automatic flow control devices must not be installed prior
to system cleaning and flushing.
• Check local code for any requirement for electrical fittings.
www.DaikinApplied.com
9
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Installation
Drain Piping
• Condensate piping can be steel, copper, or PVC. A
means of disconnection must be furnished to facilitate fan
deck removal.
• No point of the drain system may be above the drain pan
of any unit.
• Pipe insulation is recommended to avoid condensation.
• Suggested slope of the drain pipe is at least 1/8" per foot
to facilitate adequate condensate drainage but local code
requirement should prevail.
• Slide the pipe over the drain pan nipple and tighten
the collar on the pipe with a hose clamp (supplied by
installer).
• The drain line should be supported to prevent undue
stress on the secondary drain pan. Make sure the drain
line is free of kinks.
• Trap drain line according to local codes.
NOTE: Traps for exposed units may be located outside
the cabinet as there is insufficient space inside the unit.
• Cap overflow drain connection or connect it with clear
piping to the point where it can be used as an indicator
for a clogged main drain connection.
Chilled Water Pipe Connections
No Valve Package
• Connect chilled water pipes to the unit. The water supply
is on the bottom and water return is on top of the coil
header.
Connecting to a Factory-Installed Valve
& Piping Package
To view connection locations for factory-installed valve & piping
packages, see Valve and Piping Packages on page 39.
Before installing supply and return lines to a factory piping
package, review the following items.
• All piping connections are 5/8" O.D.S. (1/2" nominal)
female copper connections.
• Supply and return piping should not interfere with the
secondary drain pan or condensate line. The installer
must provide adequate piping system filtration and water
treatment. Daikin Deluxe and Enhanced piping packages
include a strainer which prevents debris from entering the
coil. Clean the strainer regularly.
• The fan coil ships with brackets and special shipping
packaging to adequately support the piping package
during shipment. Remove the packaging before
connecting to the water piping but leave the support
brackets in place during and after the installation.
• Set ALL valves to the fully open position to prevent
damage to the valve seat during brazing. Use a
quenching cloth as protection.
• Remove the secondary drain pan, if in place, to prevent
exposure to dripping solder or excessive temperatures.
• Solder water piping connections to supply and return end
connections. Avoid overheating factory soldered joints to
prevent the possibility of leakage.
• Insulate fan coil piping to secondary drain pan
connections and any piping that is not above the
secondary drain pan.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS10www.DaikinApplied.com
Installation
Field-Installed Valve & Piping
Review General Guidelines on page 9 before beginning.
Then carry out the following steps to install valves and piping.
• For units equipped with a secondary coil make sure that
an air vent is included in the return line piping. Primary
coils are factory-equipped with vents, secondary coils are
not. See Figure 7. Valve Package support brackets are
included with the secondary coil kits.
• Remove the secondary drain pan, if in place, to prevent
exposure to dripping solder or excessive temperatures.
NOTE: Field-installed valve and piping packages provided
by Daikin include the secondary drain pan. If valve
packages by the field, secondary drain pans should
be provided by others.
• Slide ½" copper tubing or connection couplings (provided
by installer) onto the coil connections. Solder the joint
using a good-quality, lead-free solder to provide a
watertight connection.
• After connections are complete, insulate all piping to the
coil connections as necessary to prevent condensate
from dripping outside of the secondary drain pan.
• Install the optional secondary drain pan.
Shutoff/Balancing Valve
If the unit does not have a factory-installed valve & piping
package, the changeover switch or sensor can be ordered for
field installation. The installer should attach the sensor or auto
changeover switch parallel to and in direct contact with the
supply water pipe.
NOTE: The installer is responsible to ensure the changeover
sensor is installed in a location that can sense active
water temperature. Otherwise, the unit may fail
to sense the correct operating mode and disable
temperature control.
When using field-supplied 3-way control valves, install the
changeover sensor upstream of the valve and the bypass
on the supply water pipe. When using field-supplied two-way
control valves install the changeover sensor in a location that
will detect active water temperature. The unit must always be
able to sense the correct system water temperature, regardless
of the control valve position.
NOTE: The maximum length of the automatic changeover
wire cannot exceed 10 feet from the control panel
to the sensor. If the wire extends beyond the unit
chassis, use shielded conductors to eliminate radio
frequency interference (RFI).
Figure 8: Automatic Changeover Switch and Sensor
Each fan coil should be at least be equipped with shutoff valves
on both the supply and return lines for easy serviceability
and removal if it becomes necessary. We suggest using our
combination shutoff/balancing valves between the main supply
line and the fan coil unit. These are furnished as part of a fieldinstalled valve & piping package. The balancing valve installed
on the return line is used to adjust the water flow to provide the
best performance.
Automatic Changeover Sensor
Two-pipe changeover units require an automatic changeover
switch or pipe sensor that determines heating or cooling
mode based on the supply water temperature. On units with a
factory-installed valve & piping package, the factory straps the
changeover switch or sensor to the piping supply water pipe.
See Figure 8. For field-installed Valve Packages, the ACO
must be ordered separately.
For a two-pipe system with intermediate supplemental electric
heat, a second set is required including a changeover switch.
See Two-Pipe Systems with Electric Heat on page 12
section for more details.
NOTE: The bypass bleed line is used on 2-pipe Fan Coils
with 2-way control valves to prevent stagnation of
water near the aqua-stat or pipe sensor. The bleed
line allows 3 – 4 gpm of flow to bypass the coil which
is necessary for the proper function of the automatic
changeover system. All 2-pipe valve packages
with 2-way control valves automatically include the
bypass bleed line. If the bleed line is unwanted,
it may be crimped by the installing contractor to
prevent bypass flow.
www.DaikinApplied.com11
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Installation
Steam Piping Connections
CAUTION
Coil Damage!
In all steam coil installations, the condensate return
connections must be at the low point of the coil to ensure
condensate flows freely from the coil at all times. Failure to
do so may cause physical coil damage from water hammer,
unequal thermal stresses, freeze-up and/or corrosion
Make piping connections to the steam coil per job
requirements. (Daikin does not supply steam piping
connections.) Install a 1/2", 15-degree swing check vacuum
breaker in the unused condensate return trapping as
close as possible to the coil. The following procedures are
recommended:
Two-Pipe Systems with Electric Heat
IMPORTANT
Daikin recommends operating the electric heater at the High
motor speed setting.
The electric heating coil is designed to be the total source
of heat for the unit. If used for auxiliary intermediate season
heating, additional control is required. A second changeover
switch is required. For units ordered with intermediate electric
heat, the second changeover switch is factory installed.
To protect the electric heat elements, an automatic and manual
electric heat switch disengages the electric heat to prevent
overheating. For information on resetting the manual switch,
see Electric Heat Over-Temp Reset Button on page 15. For
a typical wiring diagram, see Figure 53.
• Vent the vacuum breaker line to atmosphere or connect
it into the return main at the discharge side of the steam
trap.
• Pitch all steam supply and return mains down a minimum
of one inch per ten feet in the direction of flow.
• Do not drain the steam mains or takeoff through the coils.
Drain the mains ahead of the coils through a steam trap
to the return line.
• Overhead returns require one psig of pressure at the
steam trap discharge for each two-feet elevation to
ensure continuous condensate removal.
• Proper steam trap selection and installation is necessary
for satisfactory coil performance and service life. For
installation, use the following steps:
—— Position the steam trap discharge at least 12
inches below the condensate return connection.
This provides sufficient hydrostatic head pressure
to overcome trap losses and ensure complete
condensate removal.
—— Daikin recommends using float and thermostatic traps
because of gravity drain and continuous discharge
operation.
—— Use float and thermostatic traps with atmospheric
pressure gravity condensate return, with automatic
controls or where the possibility of low pressure
supply steam exists.
—— Always install strainers as close as possible to the
trap inlet side.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS12www.DaikinApplied.com
Installation
Electrical Connections
WARNING
Figure 9: Electrical Power Connections
A means for disconnect from electrical supply shall be
provided according to NEC or local codes. Confirm that the
power has been switched OFF before installing or servicing
the unit.
← Electrical Knockout
Installation and maintenance must be performed only by
qualified personnel who are familiar with local codes and
regulations, and are experienced with this type of equipment.
Wiring connection must be completed according to the wiring
diagram on the unit. The unit must be GROUNDED. Installation
of all field wiring must comply with NEC and local codes.
← Disconnect Switch (Optional)
Line and voltage wiring must be done in accordance with local
codes or the National Electrical Code, whichever is applicable.
Apply correct line voltage to the unit. Power to the unit must be
sized correctly. Branch circuit overcurrent protection must be
provided per local codes. See the data plate for correct ratings.
Bottom View
Standard Electrical Connection
Electrical Data
Field electrical power connections are made in the electrical
control box, which is mounted to the side of the chassis
opposite the primary coil piping connections. See Figure 9. An
optional disconnect switch is located in this box.
The wiring diagram for the unit is attached to the exterior of the
blower housing. See Figure 10. Be sure the available power
is the same voltage and phase as that shown on the unit data
plate. See Figure 3, for the location of the data plate. See page
44 through page 46 for typical wiring diagrams.
Units with an electric heat option that have the same voltage
as the unit have single-point power connections and bring the
power conductors into this same connection box through one
of the knockouts. Units with electric heat that has a different
voltage should bring the electric heat into one of the knockouts
on the chase. See Figure 9.
Figure 10: Location of the Wiring Diagram.
If provided by the field, low voltage wires should be brought
into a knockout located next to the electrical control box. See
Figure 4.
Install a strain relief and pass the wires through the strain relief
into the control box. Make the connections and reinstall the
control box cover.
Operating Voltages
Operating voltages are as follows (+/– 10%).
• 115/60/1
• 208-230/60/1
• 265-277/60/1
NOTE: Voltages listed are to show voltage range. However,
units operating with overvoltage and undervoltage for
extended periods of time will experience premature
component failure.
www.DaikinApplied.com13
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Installation
ECM Blower
If the unit is equipped with an ECM blower, additional steps
may be required during the air balancing process. The ECM
blower is controlled by a control board. Three-speed taps are
provided with an ECM blower: high, medium and low.
The unit has been factory configured to produce PSC
equivalent airflow on high speed, with medium speed at 80%
and low speed at 60% of full volume. If these settings are
acceptable, then no further configuring is necessary. If different
speeds are required select a field adjustment ECM.
Figure 13: Power Connector
Power Connector
Pin
Figure 11: ECM Blower
ECM Motor
→
Description
1
JUMPER PIN 1 TO PIN 2 FOR
2
120 VAC LINE INPUT ONLY
3
CHASSIS GROUND
4
AC LINE
5
AC LINE
Figure 14: Signal Connector
Signal Connector
EC Motor Pin Out Locations
Figure 13 and Figure 14 show the pin locations for both
connectors.
Figure 12: Connectors
Pin Description
Pin Description
1
C1 - Common
9
O
2
W/W1 – High Speed
10
BK/PWM
3
C2 - Common
11
HEAT
4
DELAY
12
R- 24V
5
COOL
13
EM/W2- Super High
6
Y1 – Low Speed
14
Y/Y2 – Super Low
7
ADJUST
15
G – Medium Speed
8
OUT-
16
OUT+
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS14www.DaikinApplied.com
Accessories
Accessories
Condensate Overflow Detection
Device
The condensate overflow detection device is a factory-installed
option on fan coils. This device has a condensate overflow
switch with dry contacts and is connected to the LV board or
MicroTech board. See Figure 15.
If you suspect it is not working properly, check to be sure that
the float is installed straight up with the proper elevation. See
Accessing/Removing the Main Fan Deck and Motor Assembly
on page 20 for instructions on removing the main drain pan
to access the device.
The condensate overflow switch needs to be wired to the
proper controller (MicroTech for example) to shut off the fan if
excessive water is present in the drain pan.
Figure 15: Condensate Overflow Switch Installation
Electric Heat Over-Temp Reset
Button
DANGER
PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD.
Power supply can cause electrical shock. Always disconnect
power to unit before servicing.
The electric heat options comes with two over-temperature
switches. The first resets automatically when the overtemperature condition no longer exists. The second, backup
high limit switch must be reset manually.
NOTE: The need to reset the manual switch may indicate that
there are improperly functioning system components.
If the switch trips again, contact Daikin Service for
help in diagnosing the cause.
To reset the manual switch, carry out the following steps:
1. Disconnect all power to the unit. Verify the power has
been disconnected.
2. Remove the raceway access covers (see Accessing/
Removing the Main Fan Deck and Motor Assembly on
page 20).
3. Access and push in the red reset button in the raceway
of the heater assembly. See Figure 17.
4. Reinstall the access cover.
5. Reconnect the power.
Figure 17: Electric Heat Over-Temp Reset Button Location
Decorative Trim Flange for
Partially-Recessed Units
A fixed trim flange is used for partially-recessed fan coils (with
height restrictions of 14.5 inches or below). Trim Flanges
are also used with fan coils featuring a bottom discharge
configuration.
The sheetrock location for the unit should be cut to the
appropriate size, then framed with steel or wooden studs
before the decorative trim flange is installed. See Figure 42 on
page 38 for a sample illustration and recommended gaps.
DO NOT secure the Trim Flange without a stud frame to the
drywall.
Figure 16: Decorative Trim Flange
← Framing Studs
← Decorative Trim
Unit
www.DaikinApplied.com15
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Initial Start Up
Initial Start Up
Cleaning & Flushing the Water
System
CAUTION
Units must be checked for water leaks upon initial water
system startup. Water leaks may be a result of mishandling or
damage during shipping. Failure by the installing contractor to
check for leaks upon start-up of the water system could result
in property damage
• Prior to first operation of any unit, clean and flush the
water circulating system of all construction dirt and debris.
• If units are equipped with water shutoff valves, either
electric or pressure operated, connect the supply and
return runouts together at each unit location. This will
prevent the introduction of dirt into the unit. See Figure 18.
• Fill the system at the water makeup connection with all air
vents open. After filling, close all air vents.
• Start the main circulator with the pressure reducing
valve open.
• Check vents in sequence to bleed off any trapped air,
ensuring circulation through all components of the
system.
• While circulating water, check for any leaks in the unit
and surrounding piping and repair as neccessary.
• Drains at the lowest point(s) in the system should be
opened for initial flush and blow-down, making sure city
water fill valves are set to make up water at the same rate.
• Check the pressure gauge at pump suction and manually
adjust the makeup to hold the same positive steady
pressure both before and after opening the drain valves.
Figure 18: Connections for flushing system piping
Return Runout
Supply Runout
Mains
Flexible Hose
• *Flush should continue for at least two hours or longer
until the drain water is clean and clear.
• Shut off the circulator pump and open all drains and vents
to completely drain down the system.
• Short-circuited supply and return run outs should now be
connected to the unit supply and return connections. Do
not use sealers at the swivel flare connections of hoses.
• Refill the system with clean water.Test the water using
litmus paper for acidity, and treat as required to leave the
water slightly alkaline (pH 7.5 to 8.5).
• Antifreeze may also be added at this time. Use
commercial grade antifreeze designed for HVAC systems
only. Do not use automotive grade antifreeze. Antifreeze
will have an effect on the performance of the unit.
• Once the system has been filled with clean water and
antifreeze (if used), precautions should be taken to
protect the system from contamination.
Venting Hydronic Coils
IMPORTANT
It is not Daikin’s policy to make recommendations on what
brand or type of water treatment is to be installed and used.
It is the responsibility of the general contractor/owner to verify
that the water supply to the units is free from contaminates,
corrosive agents, chemicals and/or minerals. The general
contractor/owner should contact a local water treatment
company regarding water quality issues and treatment. A
fouled water system will lead to premature component failure.
Hydronic coils require a vent, either manual or automatic, to
release air from the unit. Primary coils on all ThinLine fan coils
come standard with a coil air vent. It is located on the piping
side of the unit, above the coil connections.
Secondary coils on ThinLine units are not equipped with an
air vent, but one is included on all factory-supplied valve and
piping packages. It is located on the pipe closest to the outlet
coil connection. See Figure 18.
Perform the following steps to vent both primary and secondary
coils after installing the unit:
• Pressurize the building piping system with water and vent
any trapped air at system vents.
• For units with manual air vents, back the set screw out to
expel air from the unit and then re-tighten the set screw.
• Automatic air vents should require no adjustment for
the coil to vent. However, if the coil does not vent
immediately, unscrew the outer portion of the fitting to
expel air from the port. If debris has become trapped in
the vent, completely remove the outer portion of the fitting
and clean.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS16www.DaikinApplied.com
Initial Start Up
Equipment Start Up Check List
IMPORTANT
Fan coils must be filled with water before operating a circulating pump. Filling the system properly will result in immediate lubrication
of the bearings. The pump bearings should not be allowed to operate dry.
Receiving and Inspection
□ Unit received undamaged
□ Unit received complete as ordered
□ Parts for field installation received as ordered
□ Unit arrangement/hand correct
□ Unit structural support complete and correct
Handling and Installation
□ Mounting grommets/isolators used
□ Unit mounted level and square
□ Proper access provided for unit and accessories
□ Proper electrical service provided
□ Proper overcurrent protection provided
□ Proper service switch/disconnect provided
□ Proper chilled water line size to unit
□ Proper hot water line size to unit
□ All services to unit in code compliance
□ All shipping screws and braces removed
□ Unit protected from dirt and foreign matter
□ Install & connect parts for field installation
Cooling/Heating Connections
□ Protect field-provided valve package components from heat
□ Mount field-provided valve packages
□ Connect field piping to unit
□ Pressure test all piping for leaks
□ Install drain line and traps, as required
□ Insulate all piping, as required
□ Install secondary drain pan under piping, as required
Electrical/Controls Connection
□ Refer to unit wiring diagram
□ Connect incoming power service or services
□ Install and connect parts for field installation
Unit Start-up
□ General visual unit and system inspection
□ Check for proper fan rotation
□ Record electrical supply voltage
□ Check all wiring for secure connections
□ Close all unit isolation valves
□ Flush water systems
□ Fill systems with water
□ Vent water systems, as required
□ All ductwork and grilles in place
□ All unit panels and filters in place
□ Start fans, pumps, chillers, etc.
□ Check for overload conditions of all units
□ Check all ductwork and units for air leaks
□ Balance water systems, as required
□ Balance air systems, as required
□ Record all final settings for future use
□ Check piping and ductwork for vibration
□ Check all dampers for proper operation
□ Verify proper cooling operation
□ Verify proper heating operation
□ Reinstall all covers and access panels
□ Verify proper condensate drainage
Ductwork Connections
□ Install ductwork, fittings and grilles, as required
□ Flexible duct connections at unit
□ Proper supply and return grille type and size
□ Control outside air for freeze protection
□ Insulate all ductwork, as required
www.DaikinApplied.com17
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Maintenance
Maintenance
General Maintenance
Normal maintenance on all units is generally limited to filter
changes and cleaning the condensate drain pans. Units are
provided with permanently lubricated motors and require no
oiling.
Figure 19: Filter Removal for Units with Bottom Returns
Record performance measurements of volts, amps, and
water temperature differences (both heating and cooling). A
comparison of logged data with start-up and other annual data
is useful as an indicator of general equipment condition.
Filter Changes
Filter changes are required at regular intervals. The time period
between changes will depend upon the project requirements.
Some applications, such as motels, produce a lot of lint from
carpeting and linen changes, and will require more frequent
filter changes. Units equipped with a MicroTech III board may
have Change Filter indicator lights set to be activated at certain
time intervals (60, 90 or 120 days). For units which were not
provided with MicroTech board check filters at 60-day intervals
for the first year until experience is acquired. If light cannot
be seen through the filter when held up to sunlight or a bright
light, it should be changed. A more critical standard may be
desirable.
Figure 20: Filter Removal for Units with Rear Returns
↓ Pull Down
Filters can be removed without removing any panels. See
Figure 19 or Figure 20. Cabinet units are equipped with large
bottom access doors allowing easy access to the filter media
from any direction.
A. To remove the filter
Bottom return:
1. Turn the tabs on the side of the filter frame.
2. Slide your fingers along the bottom of the filter until they
reach the rear paperboard edge.
3. Pull the filter out of the unit.
Back return:
1. Turn the tabs on the bottom of the filter frame. Open the
frame.
Coils
Units provided with the proper type of air filters, even when
replaced regularly,may require periodic coil cleaning. Coils may
be cleaned in-place by removing the motor/blower assemblies
and brushing the entering air face with a soft brush in a parallel
motion with the fins. Do not brush perpendicular to the fin
orientation, damage may occur. Brushing should be followed
by blowing air through the fins with a vacuum cleaner from the
leaving air side then removing all debris with the vacuum.
2. Feel for the paperboard edge of the filter. Slide the filter
down and remove it.
C. To install a new filter
1. Bottom: Slide the filter in. Turn the tabs into place.
2. Back: Push the filter up until it clears the front lip on the
filter housing, then turn the tabs into place.
3. Close the tabs of the filter frame.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS18www.DaikinApplied.com
Maintenance
Electric Resistance Heater Assembly
Condensate Drain Pans
Electric resistance heaters typically require no periodic
maintenance when the unit’s air filters are changed properly.
Other conditions and equipment in the system may affect the
operation and service life of the heaters. The most important
operating conditions for an electric heater is airflow and
supply voltage. As a rule, Daikin recommends operating the
electric heater on the High speed, never on Low. Restricted
or insufficient airflow over the elements and/or high supply
voltage to the elements will result in the unit overheating. This
condition may result in the heater cycling on the high limit
thermal cutout and premature failure of the heater.
The main and secondary condensate drain pans should be
checked annually and cleaned and flushed as required. See
Figure 22.
Open-wire type heaters provided with ThinLine fan coils
(see Figure 21) have an automatic reset switch with a back
up high limit thermal switch. Automatic reset switches reset
after the heater has cooled. High limit thermal switches must
be manually reset. The high limit thermal cutout switch and
automatic reset switch are only safety devices, not intended for
continuous operation. With proper unit application and normal
operation, the high limit thermal devices will not trip.
The need to reset the manual switches indicates there is a
problem. Any conditions that causes high limit cutout MUST be
corrected immediately. High supply voltage causes excessive
amperage draw and may result in tripping the circuit breaker or
blowing fuses on the incoming power supply.
Figure 21: Exposed Electric Heater Assembly
Figure 22: Primary and Secondary Drain Pans
Primary Drain Pan
→
← Secondary Drain Pan
Accessing the Secondary Drain Pan
DANGER
Water coils exposed to freezing temperatures should be
drained or anti-freeze should be added to the water circuit to
avoid freezing.
To access the secondary drain pan (cabinet units), remove
the side panel from the side of the unit where the main piping
connections are made (this is opposite the control panel side).
Drain Pan
1. Remove the 4 detent pins from the drain pan and move
the pan to a location for inspection and cleaning.
2. After inspection and cleaning, reinstall the drain pans by
reversing the procedure in Step 1.
Figure 23: Drain Pan Attachment to Coil Section
www.DaikinApplied.com19
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Maintenance
Blower
Figure 24: Fan Housing
Dirt and dust should not be allowed to accumulate on the
blower wheels or housing (see typical, Figure 24). Excessive
debris can result in an unbalanced blower wheel condition
which can damage the wheel and/or motor. The wheel and
housing should be cleaned periodically using a brush and
vacuum cleaner. Care must be taken to not dislodge the factory
balancing weights on the blower blades.
Accessing/Removing the Main Fan Deck and
Motor Assembly
Both the fan deck and the main condensate drain pan are
easily removed for access and cleaning as follows.
Fan Deck:
1. Disconnect electrical power to the unit.
Figure 25: Removing Fan Deck Assembly
2. Remove the two screws that attach the fan deck to the
chassis, see Figure 25 (on sizes 10 and 12 units, there
are 4 screws to be removed).
3. Firmly grasp the fan deck and lift upward and off the unit.
See Figure 26.
4. Disconnect the fan motor wiring harness by removing the
plug where it attaches to the connector on the side of the
chassis. See Figure 26.
5. To reinstall, follow these steps in reverse order.
NOTE: Push the tabs inward on the sides of the plug to free it
from the connector base.
Monthly Intervals
• Inspect and clean the condensate drain pan to help avoid
clogging of drainage by dirt, dust, etc. Inspect drainage
piping for proper condensate flow.
Figure 26: Unit Wiring Harness
• Check and clean the coil. Clean the coil with a low
pressure water jet or low pressure air.
• Clean and tighten all the wiring connections.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS20www.DaikinApplied.com
Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Factory replacement parts should be used wherever possible
to maintain the unit’s performance, service life, operating
characteristics and testing agency listings. Replacement parts
may be purchased through a local Daikin sales representative.
Contact your local Daikin sales representative or Daikin Parts
before attempting any unit modifications. Any modifications not
authorized by Daikin could void all factory warranties and result
in personal injury and/or unit damage.
When ordering replacement parts the following information
must be supplied to ensure proper item identification:
1. Unit model number
2. Unit serial number
3. Unit orientation, hand connection (right or left hand when
facing into the airstream)
4. Complete part description including any numbers
See replacement parts list for descriptions and part numbers.
Contact Daikin for authorization of any returned parts, such as
defective parts covered under warranty.
www.DaikinApplied.com21
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Controls and Thermostats
Controls and Thermostats
Controls
A wide variety of control options are available for Daikin
ThinLine Horizontal Fan Coils, both unit-mounted and remotemounted. This section provides a brief overview of these
options and their operation. For more complete information,
contact your Daikin representative.
3-Position Fan Switch with Manual ONOFF
This three-speed fan switch (High, Med,
Low) with ON-OFF option, shown at the
right, is available as unit- or remotemounted. It operates on low-voltage
or line-voltage power and can be
provided with a factory-mounted lowvoltage interface board, which contains
three-24 volt relays with line voltage
contactors and terminal connections. The
transformer is factory-installed and wired.
Sequence of operation
• OFF: Fan is turned OFF. The
motorized fresh-air damper, when
supplied, is closed .
Low-Voltage (LV) Interface Board
The low-voltage interface board is used with any remote (wall
mounted) Daikin thermostat or control. It can also be used
in conjunction with a field-supplied controller of a building
automation system (BAS) control where low voltage is needed
to operate the fan coil. It is located in the control box for the
unit (see Figure 27).
The LV interface board includes:
• Three 24-volt relays with line-voltage contactors to
operate the fan motor speeds.
• Terminal connections for interfacing to:
—— An optional remote-mounted thermostat.
—— Low-voltage actuators for heating and cooling valves.
—— A return air sensor.
—— A pipe temperature sensor for changeover from
heating to cooling on two-pipe systems.
• A factory-wired and installed transformer.
See Figure 27 for a list of connecting points to the board. For
additional wiring information, see the typical wiring diagram
Figure 52 on page 44 or the unit’s wiring diagram, which is
attached to the fan coil exterior. (see Figure 10 on page 13).
• High, Medium, Low: Fan runs continuously at the
selected speed. The two-position, motorized fresh-air
damper, when supplied, is opened.
Figure 27: LV Interface Board 24 VAC connections
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS22www.DaikinApplied.com
Controls and Thermostats
MT155 Thermostat
For more details refer to Addendum IM 1014 — MT155 on
page 55. The MT155 series thermostat provides ONOFF control for low-voltage or line-voltage valves and fan
motors. This thermostat is designed as a remote-mount with
connection to the LV interface board mounted on the fan coil
unit. Options include manual or automatic changeover and
three-speed fan control for continuous or cycling fan operation.
Figure 28: MT155 Thermostats
TA155: A HEAT-OFF-COOL system switch manually selects
heating or cooling mode (Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B
on page 59). In the HEAT position, only the heat output
cycles with demand. In the COOL position, only the cool output
cycles with demand. In the OFF position, heating and cooling
outputs are off. Units with a two position system switch or
without a system switch must use a load transfer switch when
both heating and cooling outputs are used. This prevents
control failure and equipment damage caused by direct cycling
between loads.
TB155: An ON-OFF system switch enables auto-changeover
of heating and cooling modes (Addendum IM 1089 — MT155
A/B on page 59). In the ON position the thermostat activates
heating or cooling outputs dependant upon the relationship
between set point and ambient temperature. Heat on to cool
on dead band is 4°F. In the OFF position, heating and cooling
outputs are OFF. Units without a system switch cycle between
heating and cooling with a 4°F dead band.
Two standard control options are available:
• Continuous fan and ON-OFF valve cycle operation: The
thermostat cycles the valves on and OFF. The fan runs
continuously at the manually selected fan speed.
FAN: Some units have a switch for manual selection of fan
speed. On these units fan operation is either internally wired for
fan continuous operation or is dependant upon connection to
the fan supply input . When internally wired for fan continuous
operation, the fan will be OFF when the system switch is OFF.
When dependant upon external connections the fan may not
be OFF with the system switch in the OFF position. The fan
supply input is switched to fan speed outputs (HI-MED-LO).
• ON-OFF fan and ON-OFF valve cycle operation: The
thermostat cycles the fan from the manually selected fan
speed to OFF and it cycles the valves ON and OFF.
When the system switch is in the OFF position, the fan coil
system including the fan is shut OFF.
www.DaikinApplied.com23
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Controls and Thermostats
Digital Thermostats
Daikin offers a broad range of
remote, wall-mounted digital
thermostats with the capability
to control ON-OFF, 3-wire
and proportional modulating
valves and Normally-Closed or
Normally-Open actuator valves.
For more information, refer to
Daikin publications ED 18513
and ED 18527.
MT158 and MT168 ThermostatControllers with Digital Display
For more details refer to Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B on
page 59, Addendum IM 1016 — MT158 B on page 67 and
Addendum IM 1017 — MT168 on page 71. Series MT158
and MT168 microprocessor-based thermostat-controllers
combine a proportional integral control algorithm with adaptive
logic. They are remote-wall mounted.
Two standard control options are available:
• Continuous fan and modulating (or ON-OFF) valve
operation: The fan runs continuously at the manually
selected fan speed (high, medium or low). The controller
modulates the valves or, on the MT158, dip-switches can
be set to cycle the valves ON and OFF.
• ON-OFF fan cycle operation and modulating (or ONOFF) valve operation: The controller cycles the fan from
the manually selected fan speed to OFF. The controller
modulates the valves or, on the MT158, dip-switches can
be set to cycle the valves ON and OFF.
T170 Thermostat with Digital Display
Two thermostats are offered for remote installation only: TA170
for three-speed fan control and TB170 for staged fan operation.
Both thermostats are used for ON-OFF control of low- or
line-voltage valves with auto changeover. Detailed installation
instructions and modes of operation can be found in Addendum
IM 846 — MT170 on page 75.
Figure 30: T170 Thermostat with Digital Display
Figure 29: MT158 and MT168 Thermostats
Heating and cooling outputs for the MT158 are individually
configurable for three-wire floating control valves or ON/OFF
valves in the Normally Open or Normally Closed modes.
Heating and cooling outputs for the MT168 provide 0-10 Vdc
or 4-20 mA for proportional modulating valve control. The
integrated, three-speed fan control switch is line voltage to
allow direct connection to the fan motors. Manual or automatic
changeover is provided with remote setback capability from
a time clock or facility management system. Features include
a Fahrenheit or Celsius digital display and a built-in purge
cycle which assists the controller to determine if the system is
supplying hot water or cooling.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS24www.DaikinApplied.com
Controls and Thermostats
T180 Programmable Thermostat
Daikin offers two different 7-Day Programmable Digital
Heating/Cooling Thermostat with constant fan or Fan cycled,
ON/OFF Valve Control depending on the fan speed control.
The thermostat interface contains buttons for use in navigation
to accompanying menus/screens and for performing specific
operations. Detailed installation instructions and modes of
operation can be found in Addendum IM 1019 — MT180 on
page 85.
Figure 31: T180 Thermostat with Digital Display
MicroTech III Controller
IMPORTANT
Units equipped with MicroTech III controllers should be used
in conjunction with wall-mounted sensors only. Thermostats
should not be used with MicroTech controllers.
ThinLine fan coils can be
provided with unit-mounted
MicroTech controllers and
multiple unit- or roommounted sensors.
MicroTech is a unit-mounted
controller able to operate in
either a stand-alone noncommunicating environment
or a communicating
environment. To operate
in a communicating
environment, a board
named communication module, is installed on the unit controller.
There are two types of communication modules available with
MicroTech controllers: LonWorks and BACnet MSTP.
Unit controllers and/or I-O expansion boards have inputs
for room or return temperatures, temperature setpoint
adjustments, fan speed switches, entering water temperatures,
discharge air temperatures, changeover auto switches, low
temperature detection, emergency shutdown detection,
condensate overflow detection, dirty air filter detection and
occupancy. All sensors are software selectable and the
controller is configured based on the selection.
For units with factory installed MicroTech III controllers, please
see OM 1111 for details.
www.DaikinApplied.com25
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Controls and Thermostats
Sensors
Room Temperature Sensor with Setpoint
Adjustable Module and Fan Speed
Control
MicroTech III Wall-Mounted Room
Temperature Sensor with Timed
Override
The Digitally Adjustable sensor
provides the ultimate of temperature
control and display, simple user
interface, alarm annunciation, and
alarm reset. The easy to ready LCD
clearly identifies the system operating
mode including occupied/unoccupied
mode, fan operation and control, unit
status, timed override status, alarm
annunciation, and energy savings
mode through a series of recognizable
icons. Tactile response buttons initiate
adjustments for temperature set
points, system mode, fan mode, occupancy, tenant override
and fault reset functions. The large numeric LCD will display
space temperature (°F or °C) with the corresponding setpoint
conditions. This sensor is designed for use with BACnet or
LonWorks applications. However, it can also be installed as a
standalone sensor using factory default set points.
MicroTech III Wall Mounted Room
Temperature Sensors provide electronic
sensing of room temperatures at wall
locations. The sensor features a thermistor
(10kO), a green LED for unit status and
tenant override button.
For detailed installation instructions and modes of operation
see Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
on page 92.
3-lead NEC Class II low voltage wiring.
Sensor Specifications
• Thermistor resistance (10kΩ)
(Conforms to Advance Thermal
Products curve 2)
• Ambient Temperature Limits:
—— Shipping and Storage: 40°F to 160°F (–40°C to 71°C)
—— Operating: 40°F to 140°F (4°C to 60°C)
• Locations: NEMA Type 1, Indoor only
• Connections: Color Coded Leads
Wiring
NOTE:
1. Do not install the wire cables in the same conduit with
power wiring.
2. Never apply external voltage of any type to any terminal
or damage will result.
3. Do not exceed ratings of the device. This is a low voltage
device:
4. Always use 22-gauge wire and never locate the room
temperature sensor more than 250′ from the unit:
Wiring must be installed in accordance with the National
Electrical Code and all local codes and ordinances, which can
require the use of plenum rated cable or conduit.
Mounting Location
Locate the sensor on a wall where exposure to unrestricted air
circulation represents the average temperature of the space. A
common mistake is to mount the sensor too close to the supply
air diffuser in a room. This causes short cycling of the air
conditioning unit and large room temperature swings.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS26www.DaikinApplied.com
Controls and Thermostats
Installation
DANGER
THIS EQUIPMENT PRESENTS
HAZARDS OF ELECTRICITY.
Failure to read and follow these instructions can result in
property damage, severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Be certain that exposed portions of wires do not come in
contact with each other.
1. Turn off power at the main service panel by removing the
fuse or switching the appropriate circuit breaker to the
OFF position.
2. To remove the cover on sensor 669529001, loosen two
allen-wrench set screws located on the underside of the
cover.
3. Place the wall sensor mounting base against the wall
where the sensor where be located. Using the base as a
template trace the mounting holes onto the wall.
4. Drill a 3/16" hole at each mounting hole mark.
Utility Box Mounting of Sensor 669529001
1. Feed the cable from the utility box.
2. Strip 1/4–inch of insulation from the end of the wires.
3. Connect stripped, labeled wires to matching terminals on
the temperature sensor base. See Figure 32.
4. Tighten screws on terminal connections. Gently tug wire
to check for secure connections. Confirm that each wire
is connected to the proper terminal.
5. Neatly store excess wire back inside the utility box.
6. Mount the sensor base to the utility box using two 6-32 ×
5/8–inch flat head sheet metal screws provided with the
sensor.
7. Replace cover on wall temperature sensor by attaching
the catches at the top of the cover to the top tabs on the
sensor base. Secure the cover to the base by tightening
the two allen wrench set-screws on the bottom of the
sensor cover. Do not overtighten.
NOTE: Sensor 669529001 has two allen wrench set-screws
on the underside of the sensor cover to secure it in
place. Do not overtighten.
5. Insert wall anchors into mounting holes and tap in to the
wall surface.
6. Feed wires through the back of the sensor mounting
base and align sensor mounting holes with wall anchors.
7. Use supplied screws to secure sensor base to wall.
8. Connect stripped, labeled wires to matching terminals
on the temperature sensor. Refer to Figure 32 for wiring
details.
9. Tighten screws on terminal connections. Gently tug wire
to check for secure connections. Confirm that each wire
is connected to the proper terminal.
10. Seal the hole where the wire enters through the wall
behind the temperature sensor, with non-flammable
insulation or putty.
11. Replace cover on wall temperature sensor by snapping
it in place.
12. Turn on power to the system at the main service panel.
13. Test wall temperature sensor operation as described in
“Testing”.
NOTE: Mount the sensor five feet above the floor. Do
not mount the sensor on an outside wall, in direct
sunlight, behind a door, or in an area affected by a
vent or duct.
www.DaikinApplied.com27
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Controls and Thermostats
Wiring
Timed Override
Figure 32: Temperature Sensor Wiring to MicroTech III Unit
Controller
Press Override button for more than 3 but less than 10
seconds and Unit will return to Occupied operation until the
override time expires ( as programmed in BMS).
Figure 33: MicroTech III Room Temperature Wall Sensor
with Timed Override
Cool Test
1. Using the building automation system (BMS), adjust
room cooling setpoint to 5 degrees below room
temperature.
2. Air conditioning should come on within five (5) minutes.
Status indicator may come on.
3. Using the BMS, adjust the set temperature 2 degrees
above the room temperature and the A/C should turn off.
There may be a fan delay on your system.
Heat Test
1. Using the building automation system (BMS), adjust
room heating setpoint to 5 degrees above room
temperature.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Remedy
No LED illuminated
Check for 5 VDC at sensor, LED is
dark when 5 VDC
is not present
Unit turns on and off too frequently
Sensor must be located as described
in
“ Mounting Location”.
2. Heating should come on within five (5) minutes. Status
indicator may come on.
3. Using the BMS, adjust the set temperature 2 degrees
above the room temperature and the A/C should turn off.
There may be a fan delay on your system.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS28www.DaikinApplied.com
Factory Installed Equipment
The fresh air damper module with top or rear fresh air inlets
is available for concealed, recessed or exposed units. Fresh
Air Damper control can be automated or manual. Automatic
options include a 2-position control or a full economizer option
(MicroTech controller only).
Figure 34: Factory Installed Dampers
Factory Installed Equipment
Manual Damper – The manual damper is field-adjustable to
allow a zero to 25 percent fresh air position.
Auto Two-Position Damper – The auto two-position damper
is factory set at 25 percent when open. The damper can be set
in the field to allow a zero to 50 percent fresh air position.
Economizer Damper – The economizer damper is
accompanied by a factory-installed and wired modulating
actuator. The damper is factory set at 25 percent default
minimum and 100 percent maximum opening. The damper
is field adjustable using MicroTech III to allow a zero to 100
percent fresh air.
www.DaikinApplied.com29
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Physical Data
Physical Data
Unit Data
Table 1: Physical Data: Coils, Fans, Motors and Filters
Size 02
Size 03
Size 04
Size 06
Size 08
Size 10
Size 12
1.08 (1004)
1.08 (1004)
1.43(1323)
2.11(1962)
2.46(2281)
3.14(2917)
3.83(3559)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
Primary Coil Data
Face Area, ft2 (cm2)
Fins/inch (cm)
Connection Size
1/2" Nominal Copper (5/8" OD)
Coil Dimensions
2-Row
L × D × H, in (cm)
17.3 × 1.7 × 9
(43.9 × 4.4 × 22.9)
17.3 × 1.7 × 9
(43.9 × 4.4 × 22.9)
22.8 × 1.7 × 9
(57.9 × 4.4 × 22.9)
33.8 × 1.7 × 9
(85.9 × 4.4 × 22.9)
39.3 × 1.7 × 9
(99.8 × 4.4 × 22.9)
50.2 × 1.7 × 9
(127.6 × 4.4 × 22.9)
61.3 × 1.7 × 9
(155.7 × 4.4 × 22.9)
3-Row
L × D × H, in (cm)
17.3 × 2.6 × 9
(43.9 × 6.6 × 22.9)
17.3 × 2.6 × 9
(43.9 × 6.6 × 22.9)
22.8 × 2.6 × 9
(57.9 × 6.6 × 22.9)
33.8 × 2.6 × 9
(85.9 × 6.6 × 22.9)
39.3 × 2.6 × 9
(99.8 × 6.6 × 22.9)
50.2 × 2.6 × 9
(127.6 × 6.6 × 22.9)
61.3 × 2.6 × 9
(155.7 × 6.6 × 22.9)
4-Row
L × D × H, in (cm)
17.3 × 1.7 × 9
(43.9 × 8.8 × 22.9)
17.3 × 3.5 × 9
(43.9 × 8.8 × 22.9)
22.8 × 3.5 × 9
(57.9 × 8.8 × 22.9)
33.8 × 3.5 × 9
(85.9 × 8.8 × 22.9)
39.3 × 3.5 × 9
(99.8 × 8.8 × 22.9)
50.2 × 3.5 × 9
(127.6 × 8.8 × 22.9)
61.3 × 3.5 × 9
(155.7 × 8.8 × 22.9)
Coil Volume, Gal (Liters)
2-Row
0.19 (0.7)
0.19 (0.7)
0.24(.9)
0.32(1.2)
0.37(1.4)
0.46(1.7)
0.55(2.1)
3-Row
0.26 (1.0)
0.26 (1.0)
0.32(1.2)
0.45(1.7)
0.52(2.0)
0.64(2.4)
0.77(2.9)
4-Row
0.34 (1.3)
0.34 (1.3)
0.43(1.6
0.61(2.3)
0.70(2.6)
0.87(3.3)
1.05(4.0)
2.44(2267)
Secondary Coil Data: 1-Row Standard Capacity, Hot Water or Steam
Face Area, ft2 (cm2)
0.61(567)
0.61(567)
0.84(780.1)
1.3(1208)
1.5(1421)
1.99(1845)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
14.7 × .86 × 6
(37.3 × 2.2 × 15.2)
14.7 × .86 × 6
(37.3 × 2.2 × 15.2)
20.2 × .86 × 6
(51.3 × 2.2 × 22.9)
31.2 × .86 × 6
(79.2 × 2.2 × 22.9)
36.7 × .86 × 6
(93.2 × 2.2 × 22.9)
47.7 × .86 × 6
(121.1 × 2.2 × 22.9)
58.7 × .86 × 6 (149.0
× 2.2 × 22.9)
0.06 (0.23)
0.06 (0.23)
0.08 (0.30)
0.11 (0.42)
0.12 (0.45)
0.15 (0.57)
0.18 (0.70)
3.26 (3029)
Fins/inch (cm)
L × D × H, in (cm)
Coil Volume,
Gal (Liters)
Secondary Coil Data: 1-Row High Capacity, Hot Water or Steam
Face Area, ft2 (cm2)
0.82 (762)
0.82 (762)
1.26 (1171)
1.73 (1607)
2.04 (1895)
2.65 (2460)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
12 (4.7)
14.7 × .86 × 8
(37.3 × 2.2 × 20.3)
14.7 × .86 × 8
(37.3 × 2.2 × 20.3)
20.2 × .86 × 8
(51.3 × 2.2 × 22.9)
31.2 × .86 × 8
(79.2 × 2.2 × 22.9)
36.7 × .86 × 8
(93.2 × 2.2 × 22.9)
47.7 × .86 × 8
(121.1 × 2.2 × 22.9)
58.7 × .86 × 8
(149.0 × 2.2 × 22.9)
0.08 (0.30)
0.08 (0.30)
0.11 (0.42)
0.14 (0.53)
0.16 (0.61)
0.20 (0.76)
0.24 (0.92)
Fan Quantity
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
Motor Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Hideaway cm
L × D × H, in. ()
10.50 × 1.00 × 8.75
(26.6 × 2.5 × 22.2)
10.50 × 1.00 × 8.75
(26.6 × × 2.5 × 22.2)
16.00 × 1.00 × 8.75
(40.6 × 2.5 × 22.2)
27.21 × 1.00 × 8.75
(69.1 × 2.5 × 22.2)
32.71 × 1.00 × 8.75
(83.1 × 2.5 × 22.2)
21.81 × 1.00 × 8.75
(55.4 × 2.5 × 22.2)
27.31 × 1.00 × 8.75
(69.3 × 2.5 × 22.2)
Cabinet
L × D × H, in. (cm)
15.63 × 1.00 × 10.89
(39.7 × 2.5 × 27.6)
15.63 × 1.00 × 10.89
(39.7 × 2.5 × 27.6)
21.00 × 1.00 × 10.89
(53.3 × 2.5 × 27.6)
32.13 × 1.00 × 10.89
(81.6 × 2.5 × 27.6)
39.25 × 1.00 × 10.89
(81.7 × 2.5 × 27.6)
24.38 × 1.00 × 10.89
(61.9 × 2.5 × 27.6)
30.00 × 1.00 × 10.89
(76.2 × 2.5 × 27.6)
Fins/inch (cm)
L × D × H, in (cm)
Coil Volume,
Gal (Liters)
Fan/Motor Data
Filter Data
1" (25.4 cm) Media
Throwaway (MERV 4), MERV 7*, MERV 13* and Aluminum Washable
Quantity
* For use with ECM only
Shipping Weights
Table 2: Approximate Shipping Weights - lbs (kg)*
Unit Type
Unit Size
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
FCHC/FCHR
108 (49)
110 (50)
124 (56)
139 (63)
151 (69)
184 (84)
196 (89)
FCHH
30 (14)
33 (15)
35 (16)
45 (20)
55 (25)
62 (28)
65 (30)
Note: *Approximate dry weights do not include plenums, valve packages, hot water coils, electric heaters or other options.
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS30www.DaikinApplied.com
Physical Data
Unit Dimensions
Figure 35: Dimensions – Hideaway Fan Coil, Front Discharge – Free Return
Reheat coil shown
Top View
5.01
(4) Mounting
Holes
Secondary Drain Pan (1)
⅜" × ⅝"
Control
Box
⅝" O.D. Coil
Connections
(Typical)
1.0
C
NOTES:
1.73
(1) Secondary drain pan is only supplied with factory-provided
piping packages
(2) Same-hand connection shown, opposite-hand configuration
has secondary coil connections on the control box side
6.0
○
×
REFERENCE POINT
F
D
0.5
1.54
0.64
3.4
H
2.49
1.25
4.35
B
1.62
L
0.68
15.28
REFERENCE POINT
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
○
×
9.25
9.47
6.75
P
8.08
K
9.42
9.86
5.21
1.5
A
0.5" O.D.
Overflow Connection
3.11
Front View
Dimension
0.75" O.D.
Drain Connection
Side View
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
28.48 (723)
28.48 (723)
33.98 (863)
44.98 (1142)
50.48 (12.82)
61.48 (1562)
72.48 (1841)
Chassis Width
B
20.63 (524)
20.63 (524)
26.13 (664)
37.13 (943)
42.63 (1083)
53.63 (1362)
64.63 (1641)
Mounting Hole Distance (Rear)
C
18.64 (473)
18.64 (473)
24.14 (613)
35.14 (892)
40.64 (1032)
51.64 (1312)
62.44 (1702)
Mounting Slot Location (Front)
D
19.35 (491)
19.35 (491)
24.85 (631)
35.85 (911)
41.35 (1050)
52.35 (1330)
63.35 (1609)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.39 (442)
17.39 (442)
22.84 (581)
33.89 (867)
39.39 (1000)
50.39 (1280)
61.39 (1559)
Primary Coil Location
H
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
1.81 (46) for 2- or 3-row primary coil; 2.81 (71) for 4-row primary coil
L
K
www.DaikinApplied.com31
2.86 (73)
0.86 (22)
5.0 (127)
7.0 (178)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Physical Data
Figure 36: Dimensions – Hideaway Fan Coil With Plenum, Front Discharge – Rear Return
Top View
G
5.01
(4) Mounting
Holes
Secondary Drain Pan (1)
⅜" × ⅝"
Control
Box
⅝" O.D. Coil
Connections
(Typical)
1.0
C
NOTES:
1.73
(1) Secondary drain pan is only supplied with factory-provided
piping packages
(2) For units without mixing box
6.0
(3) Same-hand connection shown, opposite-hand configuration
has secondary coil connections on the control box side
○
×
REFERENCE POINT
F
D
0.5
1.54
0.64
5.4
H
2.49
4.35
B
1.62
21.5 (2)
1.25
20.2 (2)
17.3 (2)
L
0.68
REFERENCE POINT
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
○
×
9.25
9.47
6.75
P
8.08
8.8
K
9.88
9.42
9.86
5.21
1.5
A
0.5" O.D.
Overflow Connection
3.11
Front View
Dimension
0.75" O.D.
Drain Connection
Side View
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
30.48 (771)
30.48 (771)
35.98 (944)
46.98 (1193)
52.48 (1333)
63.48 (1612)
74.48 (1892)
Chassis Width
B
20.63 (524)
20.63 (524)
26.13 (664)
37.13 (943)
42.63 (1083)
53.63 (1362)
64.63 (1641)
Mounting Hole Distance (Rear)
C
18.64 (473)
18.64 (473)
24.14 (613)
35.14 (892)
40.64 (1032)
51.64 (1312)
62.44 (1702)
Mounting Slot Location (Front)
D
19.35 (491)
19.35 (491)
24.85 (631)
35.85 (911)
41.35 (1050)
52.35 (1330)
63.35 (1609)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.39 (442)
17.39 (442)
22.84 (581)
33.89 (867)
39.39 (1000)
50.39 (1280)
61.39 (1559)
Plenum/Return Air Opening - Width
G
21.5 (546)
21.5 (546)
27.0 (686)
38.0 (965)
43.5 (1105)
54.5 (1384)
65.5 (1664)
Primary Coil Location
H
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
L
K
1.81 (46) for 2- or 3-row primary coil; 2.81 (71) for 4-row primary coil
2.86 (73)
0.86 (22)
5.0 (127)
7.0 (178)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS32www.DaikinApplied.com
Physical Data
Figure 37: Dimensions – Hideaway Fan Coil With Plenum, Front Discharge – Bottom Return
Top View
G
5.01
0.952
Secondary Drain Pan (1)
0.952
E
(4) Mounting
Holes
⅜" × ⅝"
Return Air Opening
Control
Box
⅝" O.D. Coil
Connections
(Typical)
1.0
C
NOTES:
1.73
(1) Secondary drain pan is only supplied with factory-provided
piping packages
(2) Same-hand connection shown, opposite-hand configuration
has secondary coil connections on the control box side
6.0
○
×
REFERENCE POINT
F
D
0.5
1.54
0.64
5.4
H
2.49
1.25
4.35
B
1.62
20.2
L
0.68
17.3
REFERENCE POINT
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
○
×
9.25
9.47
6.75
P
8.08
K
11.13
9.42
9.86
0.647
5.21
0.75" O.D.
Drain Connection
A
2.25
2.11
7.812
0.5" O.D.
Overflow Connection
Front View
3.11
1.5
Side View
Dimension
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
30.48 (771)
30.48 (771)
35.98 (944)
46.98 (1193)
52.48 (1333)
63.48 (1612)
74.48 (1892)
Chassis Width
B
20.63 (524)
20.63 (524)
26.13 (664)
37.13 (943)
42.63 (1083)
53.63 (1362)
64.63 (1641)
Mounting Hole Distance (Rear)
C
18.64 (473)
18.64 (473)
24.14 (613)
35.14 (892)
40.64 (1032)
51.64 (1312)
62.44 (1702)
Mounting Slot Location (Front)
D
19.35 (491)
19.35 (491)
24.85 (631)
35.85 (911)
41.35 (1050)
52.35 (1330)
63.35 (1609)
Return Air Opening - Width
E
17.7 (450)
17.7 (450)
23.2 (589)
34.2 (869)
39.7 (1008)
50.7 (1288)
61.7 (1567)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.39 (442)
17.39 (442)
22.84 (581)
33.89 (867)
39.39 (1000)
50.39 (1280)
61.39 (1559)
Plenum Width
G
21.5 (546)
21.5 (546)
27.0 (686)
38.0 (965)
43.5 (1105)
54.5 (1384)
65.5 (1664)
Primary Coil Location
H
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
Secondary Coil - Standard Capacity
Secondary Coil - High Capacity
1.81 (46) for 2- or 3-row primary coil; 2.81 (71) for 4-row primary coil
L
K
www.DaikinApplied.com33
2.86 (73)
0.86 (22)
5.0 (127)
7.0 (178)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Physical Data
Figure 38: Dimensions – Cabinet Fan Coil, Front Discharge – Rear Return
Control
Box
Top
View
25.0
18.0
(4)
¾" Mounting
Holes
RefeRence Point
○
×
C.XX
2.375
D
4.5
NOTE:
A
15.28
(1) Unitisshownwithductcollarflangesforreturnanddischargeopenings
Coil connections are 5/8" O.D.
F
15.28
Front
View
S
E
S
RefeRence Point
○
×
2.23
3.98
5.48 6.48
8.91
14.0
11.75
12.00
3.51
1.0
1.0
Back View
RefeRence Point
○
×
Side
View
1.63
8.82
7.55
5.81
10.09
(4) 1" Electrical Power
Knockouts
(8) 2" Piping
Knockouts
1.65
7.26
9.01
12.04
(4) 2" Drain
Knockouts
4.88
3.53
Dimension
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
47.64 (1210)
47.64 (1210)
53.14 (1350)
64.14 (1629)
69.64 (1769)
80.63 (2048)
91.64 (2328)
Mounting Hole Distance
D
40.64 (1032)
40.64 (1032)
46.14 (1172)
57.14 (1451)
62.64 (1591)
73.64 (1870)
84.64 (2150)
Return Air Opening - Width
E
19.0 (483)
19.0 (483)
22.9 (581)
34.5 (876)
38.4 (975)
50.0 (1270)
61.6 (1565)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.09 (434)
17.09 (434)
22.59 (574)
33.59 (853)
39.09 (993)
50.09 (1272)
61.09 (1552)
Return Air Opening Location
S
14.32 (364)
14.32 (364)
15.13 (384)
14.82 (376)
15.63 (397)
15.32 (389)
15.01 (381)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS34www.DaikinApplied.com
Physical Data
Figure 39: Dimensions – Cabinet Fan Coil, Front Discharge – Bottom Return
Control
Box
Top
View
25.0
18.0
(4)
¾" Mounting
Holes
RefeRence Point
○
×
C.XX
2.375
D
4.5
NOTE:
Coil connections are 5/8" O.D.
A
15.28
(1) Unitisshownwithductcollarflangefordischargeopening
F
15.28
RefeRence Point
○
×
2.23
3.98
5.48 6.48
8.91
11.75
14.0
12.00
3.51
Bottom
View
5.81
Back View
8.82
Return
S
E
S
2.36
7.26
9.01
10.09
(4) 1" Electrical Power
Knockouts
(8) 2" Piping
Knockouts
12.04
(4) 2" Drain
Knockouts
1.0
RefeRence Point
○
×
1.63
Side
View
7.55
4.88
Dimension
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
47.64 (1210)
47.64 (1210)
53.14 (1350)
64.14 (1629)
69.64 (1769)
80.63 (2048)
91.64 (2328)
Mounting Hole Distance
D
40.64 (1032)
40.64 (1032)
46.14 (1172)
57.14 (1451)
62.64 (1591)
73.64 (1870)
84.64 (2150)
Return Air Opening - Width
E
18.5 (470)
18.5 (470)
22.88 (581)
34.5 (876)
38.38 (975)
50.0 (1270)
61.63 (1565)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.4 (442)
17.4 (442)
22.98 (588)
33.59 (853)
39.39 (1001)
50.39 (1280)
61.09 (1552)
Return Air Opening Location
S
14.57 (370)
14.57 (370)
15.13 (384)
14.82 (376)
15.63 (397)
15.32 (389)
15.01 (381)
www.DaikinApplied.com35
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Physical Data
Figure 40: Dimensions – Cabinet Fan Coil, Bottom Discharge – Rear Return
Control
Box
Top
View
35.0
28.0
(4)
¾" Mounting
Holes
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
C.XX
2.375
D
4.5
Coil connections are 5/8" O.D.
A
15.28
F
15.28
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
Bottom
View
Discharge
S
2.73
E
S
2.23
7.5
Return
3.98
5.48 6.48
8.91
11.75
14.0
12.00
15.14
3.51
5.81
Back View
7.26
9.01
15.2
10.09
(4) 1" Electrical Power
Knockouts
(8) 2" Piping
Knockouts
12.04
(4) 2" Drain
Knockouts
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
1.65
8.82
3.53
Dimension
Side
View
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
47.64 (1210)
47.64 (1210)
53.14 (1350)
64.14 (1629)
69.64 (1769)
80.63 (2048)
91.64 (2328)
Mounting Hole Distance
D
40.64 (1032)
40.64 (1032)
46.14 (1172)
57.14 (1451)
62.64 (1591)
73.64 (1870)
84.64 (2150)
Return Air Opening - Width
E
16.22 (412)
16.22 (412)
21.7 (552)
32.72 (831)
38.22 (971)
49.22 (1250)
60.22 (1530)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.09 (434)
17.09 (434)
22.59 (574)
33.59 (853)
39.09 (993)
50.09 (1272)
61.09 (1552)
Return Air Opening Location
S
14.32 (364)
14.32 (364)
15.13 (384)
14.82 (376)
15.63 (397)
15.32 (389)
15.01 (381)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS36www.DaikinApplied.com
Physical Data
Figure 41: Dimensions – Cabinet Fan Coil, Bottom Discharge – Bottom Return
Return
Control
Box
Top
View
35.0
28.0
(4)
¾" Mounting
Holes
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
C.XX
2.375
D
4.5
Coil connections are 5/8" O.D.
A
15.28
F
15.28
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
2.73
2.23
7.5
Discharge
3.98
5.48 6.48
8.91
11.75
14.0
12.00
15.14
3.51
Bottom
View
Back View
15.2
S
E
S
7.26
9.01
10.09
(4) 1" Electrical Power
Knockouts
(8) 2" Piping
Knockouts
12.04
(4) 2" Drain
Knockouts
8.82
Return
5.81
2.36
Side
View
Dimension
S02
S03
S04
S06
S08
S10
S12
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
inch (mm)
Overall Unit Width
A
47.64 (1210)
47.64 (1210)
53.14 (1350)
64.14 (1629)
69.64 (1769)
80.63 (2048)
91.64 (2328)
Mounting Hole Distance
D
40.64 (1032)
40.64 (1032)
46.14 (1172)
57.14 (1451)
62.64 (1591)
73.64 (1870)
84.64 (2150)
Return Air Opening - Width
E
16.22 (412)
16.22 (412)
21.7 (552)
32.72 (831)
38.22 (971)
49.22 (1250)
60.22 (1530)
Discharge Opening - Width
F
17.09 (434)
17.09 (434)
22.59 (574)
33.59 (853)
39.09 (993)
50.09 (1272)
61.09 (1552)
Return Air Opening Location
S
14.32 (364)
14.32 (364)
15.13 (384)
14.82 (376)
15.63 (397)
15.32 (389)
15.01 (381)
www.DaikinApplied.com37
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Physical Data
Figure 42: Dimensions – Recessed Cabinet Fan Coil with Ceiling Plate
25.0
29.5
NOTES:
(1) See sheet #1 for unit dimensions
(2) For installations with height restrictions below
14", use the fixed trim flange accessory
4.5
2.0 typ.
7.0
7.0
X
Y
Metal or Wood Stud Frame
Multi-purpose Screw
2.0 typ.
Bottom View
Unit Cabinet
Ceiling Material
1/4" Gap
Trim Flange
Trim Flange Securing Detail
NOTE: Max 1/4" all-around gap is recommended between
the cabinet unit and the trim flange
Unit
Cabinet
14.5" min.
16.0" max.
3.0
Detail A
Floating Ceiling Panel
Detail A
Side View
Plate to cabinet connection for fully recessed units
Figure 43: Dimensions – Trim Flange Mount
25.0
29.5
NOTES:
2.0 typ.
7.0
7.0
X
Y
(1) See sheet #1 for unit dimensions
(2) For installations with height restrictions below
14", use the fixed trim flange accessory
4.5
Metal or Wood Stud Frame
Multi-purpose Screw
2.0 typ.
Bottom View
Unit Cabinet
Ceiling Material
1/4" Gap
Trim Flange
Trim Flange Securing Detail
NOTE: Max 1/4" all-around gap is recommended between
the cabinet unit and the trim flange
Unit
Cabinet
14.5" min.
16.0" max.
3.0
Detail A
Floating Ceiling Panel
Side View
Detail A
Plate to cabinet connection for fully recessed units
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS38www.DaikinApplied.com
Valve and Piping Packages
Valve and Piping Packages
Factory-Installed Valve and Piping Packages
Factory valve and piping packages are available for both
two-pipe and four-pipe systems with either right or left hand
connections. Four-pipe systems can be configured with the
heating and cooling connections on the same or opposite
sides of the unit. Packages can be either factory-installed or
factory-assembled and shipped loose with the unit. All factoryassembled packages are fully leak tested. Units are also
available without valve and piping packages in either a righthand or left-hand configurations.
Available Packages
Factory-installed packages are soldered to the coil and wired to
the unit control box, MicroTech controller or LV Interface Board.
For field-installed packages, chilled and hot water pipes are the
only field connections required. Piping is 1/2" nominal copper
(5/8" OD).
Shut-Off Only Packages
Figure 44: Four-Pipe Deluxe Valve and Piping Package
All factory-installed valve packages are flexible, configurable
and fully software-selectable in our Daikin Tools™ selection
program. Custom valve packages are available also.
Numerous piping packages are available to match design
configurations. Additional components can be added to meet
exact requirements, including P/T ports, unions, and flexible
stainless steel hoses.
Shut-Off Only piping packages provide interconnecting copper
piping and shut-off ball valves for ease in connecting supply
and return lines to the unit. Four-pipe packages include a
venting valve for the preheat or reheat coil. Primary coils on all
units have an integral venting valve.
Figure 45: Shut-Off Only Package
C
O
I
L
(See Figure 50 for components key)
Basic Packages
Basic valve and piping packages add control valves to the
Shut-Off Only package. All Daikin control valves are factorymounted in the supply water pipe. See Control Valve Options
on page 41 for more information on the variety of control
valves available.
Figure 46: Basic Package
Pre-determined field connection points are located for easy
access. The installing contractor can pre-pipe the building
water connections before the units arrive on the jobsite. A label
clearly identifies chilled and hot water connection points on
every unit.
All chilled water piping and components are located to allow
condensate to drain into the secondary drain pan supplied with
the valve package. Insulation of the factory piping package is
not required.
www.DaikinApplied.com39
C
O
I
L
(See Figure 50 for components key)
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Valve and Piping Packages
Enhanced Packages
Deluxe Packages
Enhanced valve and piping packages add a strainer to the
Basic package supply water pipe. The strainer body is cast
brass construction with a stainless steel mesh that is easy to
remove for cleaning.
Deluxe valve and piping packages add a strainer to the
Premium package. The strainer is available with or without an
optional draining (blow-off) valve.
Figure 47: Enhanced Package
C
O
I
L
Figure 49: Deluxe Package
C
O
I
L
(See Figure 50 for components key)
(See Figure 50 for components key)
Premium Packages
Premium valve and piping packages replace the Basic
package a ball valve in the return line with a manual or
automatic circuit setter. The manual circuit setter is also known
as a manual flow control valve. The auto circuit setter acts as
both a flow setting device and a shut-off valve. It allows water
flow through the fan coil to be set quickly and accurately. The
circuit setter includes a cartridge within the valve body that is
sized to allow a specific flow rate through the coil without any
action required by a system piping balancer.
P/T ports are included, which are used to measure the
temperature or pressure drop across the valve. This pressure
drop can be compared to factory supplied tables that relate the
pressure drop to a specific flow rate. The manual circuit setter
valve also has a memory stop so that the correct setting can
be found quickly.
Figure 48: Premium Package
C
O
I
L
(See Figure 50 for components key)
Figure 50: Components Key for Schematics
Manual Shutoff Ball Valve: Water shut-off.
Handle rotates 90 degrees.
Manual Shutoff Ball Valve with Memory
Stop: Used on return line for limiting water
flow.
2-Way, N.C., On/Off Valve, Spring Return:
Turn On or Off water flow to the coil in
response to 24V or line voltage signal
3-Way, N.C., On/Off Valve, Spring
Return: Bypass water flow away from coil
in response to 24V or line voltage signal.
Includes fixed orifice for balancing.
2-Way Modulating Valve (3-wire or
proportional): Modulates water flow in
response to 24V signal.
3-Way Modulating Valve (3-wire or
proportional): Modulates or bypass water
flow in response to 24V signal. Includes
fixed orifice for balancing.
PT Port: For connecting a pressure or
temperature gauge.
Y-Strainer: Removable screen filters out
small particles from supply line during
normal system operation.
Manually Adjustable Circuit Setter with
Shutoff: Pressure-dependent, ball-type,
manual flow control.
Cartridge-Type, Auto-Fixed Circuit Setter:
Pressure-compensated, automatic fixed-flow
control.
Union: For easy removal of piping from coil.
Bypass Balancing Valve: Adjustable
balancing of water flow through the bypass
circuit on a 3-way control valve.
Note: Daikin 3-way valves are equipped with a fixed balance orifice in the bypass line,
eliminating the need for a separate balancing valve
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS40www.DaikinApplied.com
Valve and Piping Packages
Control Valve Options
Except for Shut-off Only packages, all valve and piping
packages include control valves for controlling water flow. All
Daikin control valves are factory assembled and mounted in
the supply water pipe downstream of the coil. Several options
are available:
Two-Way Two-Position Valves
These valves will be either Fully-Open or Fully-Closed in
response to a line voltage (115, 208-230 or 265-277 VAC)
or 24 VAC signal from the Daikin thermostat or MicroTech
controller. Some means of relieving pump head pressure
should be applied when two-way valves are selected.
Normally-Open or Normally-Closed valves are available, both
spring-return type.
Three-Way Two-Position Valves
These valves either allow full water flow through the coil or
divert the flow through a bypass line. The valves respond to
a line voltage (115, 203-230 or 265-277 VAC) or to 24 VAC
signal from the Daikin thermostat or MicroTech controller. All
standard three-way valves come with a fixed-balance orifice in
a bypass line to compensate for flow balancing in the bypass
position, eliminating the need for an additional balancing valve.
Normally-Open or Normally-Closed valves are available.
Two-Way Modulating Valves
These valves modulate the water flow through the coil in
response to a signal from the Daikin thermostat or controller.
Standard Daikin modulating valves are three-wire floating point
valves. Zero to 10 VDC equal percentage proportional valves
are also available. The modulating valves are factory mounted
in the supply water pipe upstream of the coil. Daikin modulating
valves are failed-in-place type.
Three-Way Modulating Valves
These valves modulate water flow through a coil in response
to a signal from a Daikin thermostat or controller. Three-way
valves allow water that is directed through the coil to mix with
water that is directed through the bypass line. This mixture
exits through the leaving water pipe. Modulating valves are
three-wire, floating-point valves or 0-10 VDC equal percentage
proportional. The modulating valves are factory mounted in
the supply water pipe upstream of the coil. Daikin modulating
valves are failed-in-place type.
Selecting Correct Size Modulating
Valves
Daikin Tools software automatically selects the best modulating
valve size for the unit and coil being considered. By combining
the ARI performance data, the coil flow rate and the DP across
the water coil, the water coil Cv is calculated and the best
matching modulating port size is selected. Valve and piping
packages can easily be configured and automatically selected
using Daikin Tools.
NOTE: MicroTech controllers do not currently support 0-10
VDC Proportional valves.
www.DaikinApplied.com41
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Valve and Piping Packages
Figure 51: Factory-installed Valve & Piping Packages (right-hand shown)
Connecting
or Heating
ConnectingPipe
PipeLocations:
Locations: 2-Pipe
2-Pipe Cooling
Cooling Only,
Right-hand
Deluxe Package shown
Deluxe Package shown, see schematic (page 2) for the list of components selected for this package
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
5.38
3.42
Primary
Supply
Front
View
Primary
Return
0.56‡
1.5†
7.0
REFERENCE POINT
20.25
B
A
† Overflow Connection
‡ Drain Connection
○
×
End
View
Primary
Supply
4.43
5.5
10.42
11.1
Primary
Return
10.8
10.58†
Primary Package Connections from Reference Point
(2- & 3-row Coil)
Name
Component Description
Supply (A)*
Return (B)*
Basic 2W
2Way control valve, shut-off valves
12.2
16.2
Basic 3W
3Way control valve, shut-off valves
12.2
17.0
Enhanced 2W
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer
15.8
16.3
Enhanced 3W
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer
15.8
17.0
Premium 2W, auto flow
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, auto flow-setter
12.3
15.8
Premium 2W, manual flow
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, manual flow-setter
12.3
16.6
Premium 3W, auto flow
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, auto flow-setter
12.2
14.8
Premium 3W, manual flow
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, manual flow-setter
12.2
15.6
Deluxe 2W, auto flow
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, auto flow-setter
15.8
15.8
Deluxe 2W, manual flow
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, manual flow-setter
15.8
16.6
Deluxe 3W, auto flow
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, auto flow-setter
12.2
14.8
Deluxe 3W, manual flow
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, manual flow-setter
12.2
15.6
NOTE: For 4-row Primary Coils add 1" to the dimensions A and B shown
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS42www.DaikinApplied.com
Valve and Piping Packages
Figure 51 continued: Factory-installed Valve & Piping Packages (right-hand shown)
Connecting
Pipe
Locations:
4-Pipe
Cooling
and
Same-side Right-hand
Connecting
Pipe
Locations:
4-Pipe
Cooling
& Heating,
Heating Same-side,
Deluxe Package shown
Deluxe Package shown, see schematic (page 2) for the list of components selected for this package
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
10.35
7.7
5.38
3.42
Primary
Supply
Secondary
Return
Primary
Return
Secondary
Supply
0.56‡
1.5†
7.0
Front View
† Overflow Connection
‡ Drain Connection
20.25
REFERENCE POINT
A
K
B
REFERENCE POINT
○
×
○
×
Primary
Supply
D
C
Secondary
Return
4.4
X
5.5
11.1
10.42
7.9
10.8
Primary
Return
10.58†
Secondary
Supply
Primary Piping End View
Name
Basic 2W
Basic 3W
Enhanced 2W
Enhanced 3W
Premium 2W, auto flow
Premium 2W, manual flow
Premium 3W, auto flow
Premium 3W, manual flow
Deluxe 2W, auto flow
Deluxe 2W, manual flow
Deluxe 3W, auto flow
Deluxe 3W, manual flow
Component Description
2Way control valve, shut-off valves
3Way control valve, shut-off valves
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, auto flow-setter
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, manual flow-setter
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, auto flow-setter
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, manual flow-setter
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, auto flow-setter
2Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, manual flow-setter
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, auto flow-setter
3Way control valve, shut-off valves, strainer, manual flow-setter
Secondary Piping End View
Primary Package
Connections from Reference
Point (2- & 3-row Coil)
Secondary Package
Length
Secondary Coil Connection
from Reference Point
Supply (A)*
Return (B)*
Return
(C)
Supply
(D)
Preheat
(K)
Reheat
(K)
12.2
12.2
15.8
15.8
12.3
12.3
12.2
12.2
15.8
15.8
12.2
12.2
16.2
17.0
16.3
17.0
15.8
16.6
14.8
15.6
15.8
16.6
14.8
15.6
6.5
9.0
6.5
9.0
6.1
10.6
5.1
9.6
6.1
10.6
5.1
9.6
7.1
7.1
10.7
10.7
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
10.7
10.7
10.7
10.7
High
Capacity
(X)
Standard
Capacity
(X)
4.53
1.03
0.8
2.8
NOTE: For 4-row Primary Coils add 1" to the dimensions A and B shown
www.DaikinApplied.com43
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 52: Fan Coil Wiring Diagram – Typical Low Voltage Interface Board and ECM, Intermediate Electric Heat, F/A
Damper, 3-Speed Switch–Unit Mounted
Wiring Diagram
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS44www.DaikinApplied.com
Wiring Diagram
Figure 52 continued: Fan Coil Wiring Diagram – Typical Low Voltage Interface Board and ECM, Intermediate Electric Heat,
F/A Damper, 3-Speed Switch–Unit Mounted
www.DaikinApplied.com45
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 53: Fan Coil Wiring Diagram – Typical MicroTech Controller with ECM and Economizer, Intermediate Electric Heat
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS46www.DaikinApplied.com
Wiring Diagram
Figure 53 continued: Fan Coil Wiring Diagram – Typical MicroTech Controller with ECM and Economizer, Intermediate
Electric Heat
www.DaikinApplied.com47
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 54: Fan Coil Wiring Diagram – Unit Mounted 3 Speed Switch, Low Voltage Valves
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS48www.DaikinApplied.com
Model Number Description
Model Number Description
Table 3: Model Number Description: Fields 1—21
Field
Code
1
FC
2
HC
3
1
4
02
5
A
6
A
7
G
8
M
9
Y
10
YY
1. Unit Type
11
W
12
3
13
12
14
R
• 2 = 2 row
• FH = cabinet unit heater
• 3 = 3 row
• HC = horizontal, exposed
• HH = horizontal, concealed
3. Design Series
• 1 = Design 1
4. Unit Size - nominal capacity
• 02 = 200 cfm
16
T
• L = left hand
• R = right hand
15. Primary Coil Piping Package
• Y = none
• 08 = 800 cfm
16. Primary Coil Connection Type
• 10 = 1000 cfm
• S = sweated
• A = 115/60/1
• E = 208-230/60/1
• J = 265-277/60/1
6. Coil fin type
• A = aluminum
7. Coil casing material
• G = galvanized
8. Coil air vent
• M = manual
• A = auto
9. Coil coating
• Y = none
10. Not currently used
• YY = none
11. Primary Coil Type
• C = chilled water only
• W = CW/HW 2-pipe
• H = hot water only
• S = steam
21
N
14. Primary Coil Connection Hand
• L = shipped loose
5. Volts/Hertz/Phase
20
Y
• 12 = 12 fins per inch
• F = factor installed
• 14 = 1400 cfm
19
Y
• 4 = 4 row
• 04 = 400 cfm
• 12 = 1200 cfm
18
12
13. Primary Coil Fins Per Inch
• 03 = 300 cfm
• 06 = 600 cfm
17
YY
12. Primary Coil Rows
• FC = fan coil
2. Product Identifier
15
F
• T = threaded
• N = none
17. Preheat Coil Type
• E1 = electric single stage
• M1 = intermediate electric single-stage
• W1 = water standard capacity
• W2 = water high capacity
• S1 = standard capacity
• S2 = high capacity
• YY = none
18. Preheat Coil Fins Per Inch
• 12 = 12 fins per inch
19. Preheat Coil Connection Hand
• L = left hand
• R = right hand
• Y = none
20. Preheat Coil Piping Package
• F = factor installed
• L = shipped loose
• Y = none
21. Preheat Coil Connection Type
• S = sweated
• T = threaded
• N = none
www.DaikinApplied.com49
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Model Number Description
Table 3 continued: Model Number Description: Fields 22—41
Field
Code
22
YY
23
W1
24
12
25
R
26
F
22. Not currently used
• YY = none
23. Reheat Coil Type
• W1 = water standard capacity
• W2 = water high capacity
• S1 = standard capacity
• S2 = high capacity
• YY = none
24. Reheat Coil Fins Per Inch
• 12 = 12 fins per inch
25. Reheat Coil Connection Hand
• L = left hand
• R = right hand
• Y = none
26. Reheat Coil Piping Package
• F = factor installed
• L = shipped loose
• Y = none
27. Reheat Coil Connection Type
• S = sweated
• T = threaded
• N = none
28. Electric Heat Power Supply
• A = 115-60-1
• E = 208-230/60/1
• J = 277-265/60/1
• Y = None
29. Electric Heat Wattage
• 005 = 0.5 kW electric heat
• 010 = 1.0 kW electric heat
• 015 = 1.5 kW electric heat
• 020 = 2.0 kW electric heat
• 025 = 2.5 kW electric heat
• 030 = 3.0 kW electric heat
• 040 = 4.0 kW electric heat
• 050 = 5.0 kW electric heat
• 060 = 6.0 kW electric heat
• 080 = 8.0 kW electric heat
• 100 = 10.0 kW electric heat
• 000 = None
27
T
28
Y
29
000
30
Y
31
P
32
PSC
33
S
34
3
35
Q
36
Y
37
MR
38
Y
39
D
40
Y
41
R
30. Not currently used
• YY = none
31. Drain Pan Material
• G = galvanized
• S = stainless steel
32. Blower Motor Type
• PSC = PSC motor
• ECM = ECM motor
• XXX = special
33. Discharge Conditions
• S = standard static
• H = high static
34. Motor Speed
• 3 = 3 speed
35. Motor Connections
• Q = quick connect
36. Not currently used
• YY = none
37. Fresh Air Damper
• MR = manual rear
• 2R = automatic, 2-position, rear
• ER = automatic, economizer
• XX = special
• YY = none
38. Not currently used
• YYY = none
39. Unit Disconnect Switch
• D = toggle disconnect switch
• X = special
• Y = none
40. Site Control Voltage
• L = 24V (low) voltage
• H = line voltage
41. Control Type
• A = analog
• D = digital
• M = MicroTech III
• R = low voltage interface board
• S = 3-speed switch
• X = Special
• Y = None
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS50www.DaikinApplied.com
Model Number Description
Table 3 continued: Model Number Description: Fields 42—56
Field
Code
42
Y
43
Y
44
Y
45
RL
46
MOR
47
Y
48
3MOU
42. Network Communication Card
• Y = none
43. Changeover Type
• Y = none
• A = auto
• M = manual
• U = user selectable
44. Programmability
• Y = none
45. Setpoint Adjustment
• YY = none
• UL = unit-mounted, +/- 3 degrees
• UF = unit-mounted, full range
• RL = remote-mounted, +/- 3 degrees
• RF = remote-mounted, full range
46. Fan Speed Control
• YYY = None
• MBU = manual, off/low/med/high,
unit-mounted
• MBR = manual, off/low/med/high,
remote-mounted
49
YYYY
50
3MOU
51
Y
52
Y
53
C
54
Y
55
Y
56
Y
47. Timed Override
• Y = none
48. Valve - Primary Coil
• See Table 4
49. Valve - Preheat Coil
• See Table 4
50. Valve - Reheat Coil
• See Table 4
51. Future Control Function
• Y = None
52. Low Temperature Protection
• A = auto
• Y = None
• X = special
53. Condensate Overflow Protection
• C = condensate overflow protection
• Y = None
• X = special
54. Discharge Air Thermistor
• Y = None
• X = special
55. Smoke Input Sensor
• Y =none
• X = special
56. Occ / Vacant Control Input
• Y = none
• X = special
www.DaikinApplied.com51
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Model Number Description
Table 3 continued: Model Number Description: Fields 57—72
Field
Code
57
Y
58
Y
59
Y
57. Filter Status Sensor
60
Y
61
S
62
18
63
P
64
I
• BP = open bottom discharge
• BS = bottom discharge with stamped louver grille
• FA = front discharge with double deflection grille
61. Cabinet Style
• FD = front discharge with duct collar
• S = standard
• FP = open front discharge
• T = tamperproof
• FS = front discharge with stamped louver grille
• Y = none
• XX = special
71. Return Air Inlet
• BS = bottom inlet with stamped louver
• 18 = 18 gauge
• BD = bottom inlet with duct collar (plenum)
• YY = none
• RD = rear inlet with duct collar (plenum)
• XX = special
• RS = rear inlet with stamped louver
63. Cabinet Coating Type
• XX = special
• B = powder coat
• W = off white
72
1
• BD = bottom discharge with duct collar
• Y = none
• I = antiqueivory
71
FR
• BA = bottom discharge with double deflection
grille
60. Future Control Function
64. Color- Cabinet
70
TA
70. Discharge Air - Outlet
• Y = none
• Y = none
69
30F
• 04 = 4 inch extended length
59. Future Control Function
• 16 = 16 gauge
68
00
69. Subbase (not applicable)
• X = special
62. Cabinet Gauge
67
00
• 00 = none
• X = special
• Y = none
66
S
68. Right Hand End Pocket Extension
• Y = none
58. Fan Status Sensor
65
00
• YY = no plenum (open return)
72. Filter
• 1 = 1 inch Throwaway Filter
• 3 = 1 inch Throwaway + (1) Extra
• G = soft gray
• C = cupola white
• P = putty beige
• Y = none
• X = special
65. Cabinet Depth Extension
• 00 = none
66. Unit Lineup Position
• S = standalone
67. Left Hand End Pocket Extension
• 00 = none
• 04 = 4 inch extended length
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS52www.DaikinApplied.com
Model Number Description
Table 3 continued: Model Number Description: Fields 73—78
Field
Code
73
YYY
74
Y
75
A
76
S
77
Y
78
1
73. Special Options
• YYY = none
74. Reserved for future use
• Y = none
75. Agency Listing
• A = ETL, CETL, ARI
• R = ETL, CSA
• X = special
• Y = none
76. Packaging
• S = Standard
• T = palletized based on tagging and by floor
77. Extended Warranty
• Y = none (standard warranty)
• 1 = 1 year Extended component warranty
(30 month from shipment or 24 month from
installation)
• 2 = 2 year Extended component warranty
(42 month from shipment or 36 month from
installation)
• 3 = 3 year Extended component warranty
(54 month from shipment or 48 month from
installation)
• 4 = 4 year Extended component warranty
(66 month from shipment or 60 month from
installation)
• X = special
78. Product Style
• 1 = Style 1
Figure 55: Model Number Detail — Valve Package Fields 48—50
3 O M U
Coil Valve Type
• Y = none
• 2 = two-way
• 3 = three way
Unpowered Position
• Y = none
• C = closed
• O = open
Control Type
• Y = none
• E = EOC (two-position)
• M = modulating
Actuator Input
• Y = None
• L = Low Voltage (24 Volt)
• U = Unit Voltage
• P = 0-10V Proportional
• F = 3 Wire Floating Point
www.DaikinApplied.com53
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS54www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 1014 — MT155
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1014
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 910102989
Date: October 2013
MT 155 Thermostat
Installation
DANGER
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE
THIS THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/ OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment,
disconnect power before installing or servicing. Use only
wiring with insulation rated for full thermostat operating
voltage. Use copper wire only. Insulate or wirenut all unused leads. Any wiring, including the remote probe,may
carry the full operating voltage of the thermostat.
To avoid potential fire and/ or explosion do not use in
potentially flammable or explosive atmospheres. Retain
these instructions for future reference. You must review
your application and national and local codes to ensure
that your installation will be functional and safe.
Figure 1: Removing Jumper JP-1
REMOVE JP1
WHEN USING A
REMOTE SENSOR
2. For wall installations, mount the thermostat on an
inside wall approximately 5 feet above the floor. The
location should provide circulation at average room
temperature. Avoid direct sunlight or sources of hot or
cold air in the room or wall.
3. Remove the knob and then the cover. Mount
thermostat base assembly to the outlet box using the
screws provided, tighten the screws evenly but do not
over tighten. Make wiring connections as noted.
4. To use a remote sensor, remove jumper JP-1 to
disable local sensing. See Figure 1. Failure to remove
JP-1 when using a remote sensor will cause improper
operation of the thermostat. Some units do not have
remote sensing capability. See Application Notes.
5. Reinstall the cover assembly. Install cover locking
screw provided. Reinstall the knob.
6. Checkout: After wiring and installation are complete,
energize the system and check the operation. Adjust
the thermostat as necessary to complete at least one
cycle. Be sure the thermostat and all other equipment
are functioning correctly.
JP1
IM 1014 MTA/B 155 Thermostat
INSTALL COVER
LOCKING SCREW
1. Install the thermostat with the two furnished mounting
screws to a standard 2" × 4" electrical box, 4-11/16" ×
21/8" square device box with a 2" x 4" adapter ring or
to a 4" × 4" box with accessory adapter plate.
IM IM 1152-355
Addendum IM 1014 — MT155
Thermostat Operation
Application Notes
Temperature Range: 50°F - 90°F (10°C - 32°C)
1. To use a remote sensor, remove jumper JP-1 to disable
local sensing. See Figure 1. Failure to remove JP-1
when using a remote sensor will cause improper
operation of the thermostat. Some units do not have
remote sensing capability.
TA155: A HEAT-OFF-COOL system switch manually selects
heating or cooling mode. In the HEAT position, only the heat
output cycles with demand. In the COOL position, only the cool
output cycles with demand. In the OFF position, heating and
cooling outputs are off. Units with a two position system switch
or without a system switch must use a load transfer switch
when both heating and cooling outputs are used. This prevents
control failure and equipment damage caused by direct cycling
between loads.
2. Units with remote sensing capability have a four-position
terminal block at TB1. If TB1 is two position the unit is
local sensing only.
3. Remote probe wiring should be located away from any
electrical motors or power wiring
TB155: An ON-OFF system switch enables auto-changeover of
heating and cooling modes. In the ON position the thermostat
activates heating or cooling outputs dependant upon the
relationship between set point and ambient temperature. Heat
on to cool on dead band is 4°F. In the OFF position, heating
and cooling outputs are off. Units without a system switch cycle
between heating and cooling with a 4°F dead band.
4. Some units are internally wired for permanent fan
continuous operation.
5. On units with a Fan Supply input, the operation of the fan
is determined by wiring connection. For fan continuous,
jumper the Fan Supply input (TB2-5) to the Switched
Power output (TB3-3).
6. For fan cycling operation with a call for heat or cool, a fan
relay must be used.
FAN: Some units have a switch for manual selection of fan
speed. On these units fan operation is either internally wired for
fan continuous operation or is dependant upon connection to
the fan supply input . When internally wired for fan continuous
operation, the fan will be off when the system switch is off.
When dependant upon external connections the fan may not
be off with the system switch in the off position. The fan supply
input is switched to fan speed outputs (HI - MED - LO).
7. Observe electrical ratings. Thermostatic outputs are pilot
duty only.
SWITCHED POWER: L1 power is switched to this output any
time the system switch is out of the OFF position.
Ratings
Table 1: Fan and system switches
Inductive
Voltage
Rating
FLA
LRA
Resistive
Amps
24 VAC
120
Pilot
Duty
Thermostatic
Switching
N.A.
N.A.
5.8
34.8
N.A.
24 VA
10 VA
6.0
125 VA
240
2.9
20 VA
17.4
5.0
125 VA
277
2.4
20 VA
14.4
4.2
125 VA
20 VA
Table 2: Wire Lead Colors (if applicable)
Wire Color
Purpose
White with Orange Stripe
Fan High
White with Red Stripe
Fan Med.
White with Brown Stripe
Fan Low
Red
Heat
Blue
Cool
Black
L1
Yellow
L2 or Neutral
Orange
Switched Power
Violet
Fan Supply
Brown
Remote Probe
Brown
Remote Probe
IM 1014 • MT A/B 155 THERMOSTAT
56
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1014 — MT155
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 2: Units with remote sensing capability
TB3
TB3-1
HEAT
OUTPUT
TB3-2
COOL
OUTPUT
Figure 4: Units with no switches with local/remote sensing
capability
HEAT
OUTPUT
TB3-2
COOL
OUTPUT
1
TB3-1
Figure 3: Units with switches used for local sensing only
TB3
HEAT
OUTPUT
TB3-2
COOL
OUTPUT
1
TB3-1
2 3
2
1
FAN LOW
TB2-5
FAN SUPPLY
4
TB1-2
REMOTE PROBE 2
TB1-1
FAN
L1
Figure 5: Units with no switches used for local sensing
only
TB3
TB3-1
HEAT
OUTPUT
TB3-2
COOL
OUTPUT
CONNECT
FOR FAN
CONTINUOUS
L2 or NEUTRAL
TB1-4
NO CONNECTION
TB1-3
TB3-3
L1
TB1
1
TB2-4
5
TB1
FAN MED
TB1-3
REMOTE PROBE 1
2 3
FAN HIGH
TB2-3
TB1-4
NO CONNECTION
TB3-3
1
TB2-2
4
TB1-3
L1
2 3
TB1-4
NO CONNECTION
SWITCHED POWER
1
L2 or NEUTRAL
TB2
TB3-3
TB2-1
L2 or NEUTRAL
2 3
FAN SUPPLY
1
TB2-5
CONNECT 5
FOR FAN
CONTINUOUS
TB1
4
2 3
1
FAN LOW
FAN
2 3
TB2-4
TB1
TB3
1
TB1-1
FAN MED
5
TB1-2
REMOTE PROBE 2
FAN HIGH
TB2-3
4
REMOTE PROBE 1
TB2-2
2 3
TB1-3
L1
1
TB1-4
SWITCHED POWER
2
2 3
L2 or NEUTRAL
NO CONNECTION
TB2
TB3-3
TB2-1
IM 1014 (10/13)
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-357
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS58www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1089
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: IM 1089
Date: October 2013
MT 155 A/B Thermostat Field Installation
24V Valve Packages on ThinLine™ Vertical Fan Coil Units with FactoryInstalled Low Voltage Interface Board
General
Installation
DANGER
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE
THIS THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/ OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment,
disconnect power before installing or servicing. Use only
wiring with insulation rated for full thermostat operating
voltage. Use copper wire only. Insulate or wire-nut all unused leads. Any wiring, including the remote probe, may
carry the full operating voltage of the thermostat. To avoid
potential fire and/ or explosion do not use in potentially
flammable or explosive atmospheres. Retain these
instructions for future reference. You must review your
application and national and local codes to ensure that
your installation will be functional and safe.
CAUTION
Care should be used to avoid electrostatic discharge to
the microprocessor.
This unit has configuration dip switches and jumpers.
You may need to reconfigure the thermostat for your
application.
Two-pipe system (Cooling or Heating)
To field wire a T*155 thermostat (either as wall-mounted or
unit-mounted) and field-install valve package for a 2-pipe
system the following accessories are required:
• Single-Pole Double-Throw Automatic Changeover
Switch (SPDT ACO Kit P/N 039398600)
• Thermostat TA155 (kit) – PN 107345302 or
Thermostat TB155 (kit) – PN 107345304
• 10K Return Air Sensor - PN 107345501
Step 1: Installing NC (Normally Closed)
valve packages
• Solder the appropriate inlet and outlet pipe
connections from the valve package to the coil
connections. Refer to Figures 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Snap-on the SPDT ACO Switch on the supply side of
the valve package (SPDT ACO Kit P/N 039398600 to
be ordered as field-installed option)
• Cut white wire 60 of the wiring harness leading from
the Low Voltage Interface Board terminal connection
(see Fig. 1) prior to attaching the quick-connect
connector of the On-Off valve actuator to the interface
board (Fig. 3). The white wire lead going to the
actuator will be connected to terminal No. 1 of the
ACO switch (see Fig. 5):
IM 1089 MT A/B Thermostat: Field Installation
— Terminal No. 1: black wire - to be connected to
the valve side (G terminal) with white wire of the
terminal strip
— Terminal No. 2: red wire – to be connected to the
red wire (TB3-1) of the thermostat
— Terminal No. 3: blue wire – to be connected to the
blue wire (TB3-2) of the thermostat
IM IM 1152-359
Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B
Figure 1: Automatic changeover connection between the valve actuator and the interface board
Cap the
wire
WHITE 60
G0
to TB3 - 1
of T-stat
to TB3 - 2
BLUE of T-stat
RED
BLACK
ACO
WHITE 61
WHITE
CLG +
CLG –
WHITE 62
COM
Valve
Acuator
Wiring Harness
LV
Board
Step 2: Provide power to thermostat
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 24 ( Low
fan speed) to the Low terminal
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB1- 4 (L2
Neutral) to the common terminal on Low Voltage Interface
Board (terminal C ) Refer to Figures 2 and 4.
• Remove Jumper JP1 to allow the remote mounted 10K
Return Air Sensor to operate.
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 1 (24VAC)
to the 24 V terminal connection R.
• Mount the 10K Return Air Sensor (PN 107345501) above
the filter through the knockout provided Note: (1) If a
fan coil unit is to be used for heating or cooling only, the
SPDT ACO Switch (SPDT ACO Kit P/N 039398600) is not
required. For such applications just follow Step 2.
• Connect fan speed wires from the thermostat to
appropriate Low Voltage Interface Board terminals:
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 2 ( High
fan speed) to the HI terminal
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 3 ( Med fan
speed) to the Med terminal
Figure 2: Low Voltage Interface Board shown with all additional support options
Line Voltage
Hi-Med-Lo Fan
motor control
FA
Clg. 24vac valve actuators inputs
Htg. 24vac valve actuators inputs
Clg. 24vac
valve actuators
– with quick
connects t
Room air or return air temperature sensor
Wiring Harness
Pipe sensor or ACO switch
Condensate overflow sensor output
Remote thermostat 24 VAC power
Htg. 24vac
valve actuators
– with quick
connects
Unit mounted
sensor
24VA
Changeover
pipe sensor
or switch
XFMR
LINE
VOLTAGE
Condensate overflow sensor
Available in Stock
IM 1089 • MT 155 A/B THERMOSTATS
60
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B
Figure 3: Factory-installed and wired Low Voltage Interface Board (Wiring Diagram)
Figure 4: Thermostat TB155 autochangeover to be used with ON-OFF 24V valve packages, SPDT ACO and unit-mounted
Low Voltage Interface Board
Figure 5: Automatic changeover switch (SPDT ACO Kit P/N 039398600)
www.DaikinApplied.com
3
IM 1089 • MT 155 A/B THERMOSTATS
IM IM 1152-361
Addendum IM 1089 — MT155 A/B
Four-pipe system (Cooling and Heating)
Two piping packages will be required for CW and HW coils.
The following accessories needed for field-installed thermostat
model T*155 (unit-mounted or wall-mounted):
• Thermostat TA155 (kit) – PN 107345302 or Thermostat
TB155 (kit) – PN 107345304
• 10K Return Air Sensor - PN 107345501 for unit-mounted
applications only (for wall-mounted applications the
sensor is imbedded with the thermostat)
Step 1: Installing valve packages
• Solder the appropriate inlet and outlet CW pipe
connections from the valve package to the coil
connections.
• Solder the appropriate inlet and outlet HW pipe
connections from the valve package to the coil
connections.
• Snap-on the Quick-connects of the valve actuators to the
appropriate terminals of the Low Voltage Interface Board
as per Fig. 2.
IM 1089 (10/13)
62
Step 2: Provide power to thermostat
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB1- 4 (L2
Neutral)to the common terminal on the interface board
(terminal C) Refer to Figure 2 and 4.
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 1 (24VAC)
tothe 24 V terminal connection R.
• Connect fan speed wires from the thermostat to the
appropriate Low Voltage Interface Board terminals:
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 2 ( High
fan speed) to the HI terminal
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 3 ( Med fan
speed) to the Med terminal
• Connect a wire from thermostat terminal TB2- 24 ( Low
fan speed) to the Low terminal
• Remove Jumper JP1 to allow the remote mounted the
10K Return Air Sensor to operate.
• Mount the 10K Return Air Sensor (PN 107345501) above
the filter through the knockout provided
NOTE: (2) For thermostats supplied by others refer to the
manufacturer’s installation literature and use this
manual as a guideline only.
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1015 — MT158 A
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1015
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 910102990
Date: October 2013
MTA 158 Microprocessor Thermostat
ON/OFF Controller
DANGER
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE
THIS THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/ OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment,
disconnect power before installing or servicing. Use only
wiring with insulation rated for full thermostat operating
voltage. Use copper wire only. Insulate or wirenut all
unused leads. Any wiring, including the remote probe,may
carry the full operating voltage of the thermostat.
To avoid potential fire and/ or explosion do not use in
potentially flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Retain these instructions for future reference. You must
review your application and national and local codes to
ensure that your installation will be functional and safe.
3. Remove the cover. Mount thermostat base assembly
to the outlet box using the screws provided, tighten
the screws evenly but do not over tighten. Connect
wires as shown in the appropriate wiring diagram for
your thermostat style.
4. To use a remote sensor on units with local sensing
capability, remove jumper JP-1 to disable local
sensing. Failure to remove JP-1 will cause improper
operation of the thermostat.
Figure 1: Wiring Diagram for ON/OFF Output
Configuration
LINE V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
Installation
1
2
3
4
5
CAUTION
6
Care should be used to avoid electrostatic discharge to
the microprocessor.
7
10
1. Install the thermostat with the two furnished mounting
screws to a standard 4-11/16" × 2-1/8" square device
box with a 2" × 4” adapter ring.
2. For wall installations, mount the thermostat on an
inside wall approximately 5 feet above the floor. The
location should provide circulation at average room
temperature. Avoid direct sunlight or sources of hot or
cold air in the room or wall.
LOW V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
IM 1015 MTA 158 Microprocessor Thermostat ON/OFF Controller
This unit has configuration jumpers. You may need to
reconfigure this thermostat for your application.
11
L1 (HOT)
LO
MED
FAN
L2 OR NEUTRAL
HIGH
OR SINGLE SPEED FAN
24 VAC 1
24 VAC
XFMR
24 VAC 2
SETBACK INPUT
MAIN 1
SEC 1 SECONDARY
1 OUTPUT
MAIN 1
OUTPUT
12
13
14
15
REMOTE PROBE
16
PIPE SENSOR
17
IM IM 1152-363
Addendum IM 1015 — MT158 A
Table 1: MTA 158 Operation*
Output
OFF with Demand
ON with Demand
Main 1
(Terminal 10)
ON
at temperature demand
ON
at temperature demand
Main 2
(Terminal 12)
Secondary
(Terminal 11)
Secondary 2
(Terminal 13)
NA
NA
Summer: OFF
with heat demand
Summer: ON
with heat demand
Winter: Disabled
Summer: Disabled
NA
NA
5. Remove the LCD plastic protective film. Reinstall the
cover assembly. Install the cover locking screw provided
in the hole at the left side of the control enclosure to
complete the installation.
6. Checkout: After wiring and installation are complete,
energize the system and check the operation. Adjust the
thermostat as necessary to complete at least one cycle.
Be sure the thermostat and all other equipment are
functioning correctly.
Note: * Operation determined by configuration. See Dip Switch Configuration Table.
Thermostat Operation
These thermostats are designed to control ON-OFF, N.O. and
N.C. valves, relays and Erie® three wire floating valves. These
units may include a fan switch with one or more fan speed
selections.
Mode Button Operation
OFF: All thermostat outputs are off, fan is still operational if
connected to manual fan speed switch.
AUTO: The thermostat automatically selects heating or cooling
mode depending on the set point and room temperature. The
appropriate HEAT or COOL indicator is enabled in addition to
AUTO. A 3°F dead-band is provided to prevent short cycling
between heating and cooling modes. After change-over the
control points automatically shift so that the heating off-point or
the cooling off-point equals the setpoint temperature.
COOL: The thermostat operates as a cooling-only thermostat.
by pressing the UP and DOWN arrows simultaneously. The
heating outputs are disabled.
Setback Operation
Connection of the Setback Input to 24 VAC 1 will force the
control into unoccupied mode (see wiring diagram). Pressing
an arrow key or the mode button on the thermostat cover will
disable the setback input for one hour.
Pipe Sensor Operation
If cold water is detected, the system will operate in summer
mode and the Main output will be cooling. If hot water is
detected, the system will operate in winter mode, the Main
output will be heating and First Stage Secondary Output will be
disabled. In the case of an ambiguous reading, neither hot nor
cold, the thermostat will initiate a purge cycle.
Ratings
Table 2: Fan and system switches
HEAT: The thermostat operates as a heating-only thermostat.
The cooling outputs are disabled.
If constructed without a mode button, the thermostat operates
in Auto mode, subject to configuration of the 2/4 pipe jumper
and pipe sensor input.
Inductive
Voltage
Rating
FLA
LRA
Resistive
Amps
Pilot
Duty
Thermostatic
Switching
10 VA
24 VAC
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
24 VA
120 VAC
5.8
34.8
6.0
125 VA
NA
240 VAC
2.9
17.4
5.0
125 VA
NA
277 VAC
2.4
14.4
4.2
125 VA
NA
Fan Speed Switch Operation
Fan speed is determined by manual selection from fan switch
OFF to HIGH, MEDIUM and/ or LOW. In units with the Cycling
Fan Option (demand output), the Fan operation (CYCLING vs.
CONTINUOUS) is determined by application connections. In
OFF position all outputs are off and display blank.
Up/ Down Arrow Operation
A first touch of either arrow will display the set point (a single
set point is employed for both heating and cooling). Continued
pressure on either arrow will scroll the set point to new values.
After three seconds with no pressure on either arrow, the
selected set point becomes effective and the display of the
room temperature resumes.
IM 1015 • MTA 158 MICROPROCESSOR THERMOSTAT
64
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1015 — MT158 A
Service Menu
Figure 3: Circuit Board Jumpers
Menu Selection: Select 1 to 5 by pressing the mode button or
by pressing the UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows simultaneously.
Default
-5.1°F to 5.1°F
0°F
2
Valve Stroke Time
30 sec. to 5 min.
120 sec.
3
Fan Delay to OFF
0 to 10 minutes
0 sec.
4
Compressor
Minimum OFF
Time
30 sec. to 10 min.
120 sec.
5
Purge Cycle
0 = Time Based
1 = Temperature
Based
1
Figure 2: Dipswitch Configuration
MAIN 1 OF F WIT H DE MAND
C E NT IG R ADE DIS P LAY
OP E R AT ING P OS IT ION
OP E R AT ING P OS IT ION
85 F / 60 F S E T B AC K
1 2 3 4 5 6
S E C ONDAR Y 1 OF F WIT H DE MAND
10 11 12 13
15 16 17
J P1
Range
Zone Temp Offset
5 6 7
Function
1
1 2 3 4
Item #
ON
J P4
AUTO
Adjust Value: Use UP▲ or DOWN▼ arrow.
ON
2 3 4 5 6
DIP S WIT C H
1
Access: Press UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows for 5 seconds.
Table 3: Circuit Board Jumper Configuration
Jumper Designation
Jumper Installed ON
Jumper Removed
MAIN 1 ON WIT H DE MAND
JP1
Local Sensing
Remote Sensing
FAHR E NHE IT DIS P LAY
JP4
2 Pipe System*
4 Pipe System
S E C ONDAR Y 1 ON WIT H DE MAND
N/A
N/A
90 F / 50 F S E T B AC K
Application Notes
1. When no pipe sensor is used the main output controls
cooling and the secondary output controls heating.
Display, ON-OFF Operation And 90/50°F Setback.
2. The pipe sensor should be mounted on the main coil
input for water system operation and in the main duct
system for forced air operation.
NOTE: Thermostat power must be cycled for changes in dip
switch configuration to take effect.
3. The set point and operating mode will be retained on a
loss of power.
Example: This dip switch is configured for on with demand, °F
4. When using either a remote probe or pipe sensor, run
wiring away from any electrical motors or power wiring.
Power-Up Operating Sequence
Upon application of power, an MTA158 will go directly to
normal operation.
IM 1015 (10/13)
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-365
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS66www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 1016 — MT158 B
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1016-1
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 910102991
Date: October 2013
MTB 158 Microprocessor Thermostat
ON/OFF and 3-Wire Controller
DANGER
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE
THIS THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/ OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment,
disconnect power before installing or servicing. Use only
wiring with insulation rated for full thermostat operating
voltage. Use copper wire only. Insulate or wirenut all unused leads. Any wiring, including the remote probe,may
carry the full operating voltage of the thermostat.
To avoid potential fire and/ or explosion do not use in
potentially flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Retain these instructions for future reference. You must
review your application and national and local codes to
ensure that your installation will be functional and safe.
CAUTION
IM 1016-1 MTB 158 Microprocessor Thermostat ON/OFF and 3-Wire Controller
Care should be used to avoid electrostatic discharge to
the microprocessor.
This unit has configuration jumpers. You may need to
reconfigure this thermostat for your application.
Installation
1. Install the thermostat with the two furnished mounting
screws to a standard 4-11/16" × 2-1/8" square device
box with a 2" × 4" adapter ring.
2. For wall installations, mount the thermostat on an
inside wall approximately 5 feet above the floor. The
location should provide circulation at average room
temperature. Avoid direct sunlight or sources of hot or
cold air in the room or wall.
3. Remove the cover. Mount thermostat base assembly
to the outlet box using the screws provided, tighten
the screws evenly but do not over tighten. Connect
wires as shown in the appropriate wiring diagram for
your thermostat style.
4. To use a remote sensor on units with local sensing
capability, remove jumper JP-1 to disable local
sensing. Failure to remove JP-1 will cause improper
operation of the thermostat.
5. Remove the LCD plastic protective film. Reinstall
the cover assembly. Install the cover locking screw
provided in the hole at the left side of the control
enclosure to complete the installation.
6. Checkout: After wiring and installation are complete,
energize the system and check the operation. Adjust
the thermostat as necessary to complete at least one
cycle. Be sure the thermostat and all other equipment
are functioning correctly.
IM IM 1152-367
Addendum IM 1016 — MT158 B
LINE V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
Figure 1: Wiring Diagram for 3-Wire Valve Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LOW V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
10
11
12
13
Table 1: Ratings
L1 (HOT)
Voltage
Rating
LO
MED
L2 OR NEUTRAL
FAN
HIGH
OR SINGLE SPEED FAN
24 VAC 1
24 VAC
XFMR
24 VAC 2
MAIN
SEC 1 OPEN
MAIN 2 CLOSE
SEC 2 CLOSE
REMOTE PROBE
16
PIPE SENSOR
LINE V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
4
5
6
7
LOW V OLTAG E
C ONNE C T IONS
10
11
12
13
14
N.A.
N.A.
24 VA
10 VA
120 VAC
5.8
34.8
6.0
125 VA
NA
240 VAC
2.9
17.4
5.0
125 VA
NA
277 VAC
2.4
14.4
4.2
125 VA
NA
Output
3-Wire
Floating
OFF
with Demand
ON
with Demand
Main 1
(Terminal 10)
Powers main
valve open
ON at temp
demand
ON at temp
demand
Main 2
(Terminal 12)
Powers main
valve closed
Cycles ON with
demand
Cycles ON with
demand
Secondary 2
(Terminal 13)
Figure 2: Wiring Diagram for ON/OFF Ouput Configuration
3
LRA
N.A.
Secondary
(Terminal 11)
17
2
FLA
24 VAC
Table 2: Main and Secondary Output Operation*
SECONDARY
15
1
L1 (HOT)
MED
FAN
HIGH
24 VAC 1
24 VAC
XFMR
24 VAC 2
SETBACK INPUT
MAIN 1
HEAT 2
Powers secondary
valve closed
ON at second
stage heating
demand
Summer: ON with
heat demand
Winter: Disabled
ON at second
stage heating
demand
Note: * Operation determined by configuration. See Dip Switch Configuration
Table.
OFF: All thermostat outputs are off, fan is still operational if
connected to manual fan speed switch.
L2 OR NEUTRAL
OR SINGLE SPEED FAN
FAN
Summer: OFF
Powers secondary with heat demand
valve open
Winter: Disabled
Mode Button Operation
LO
SEC 1
Thermostatic
Switching
(Pilot Duty)
Thermostat Operation
OUTSIDE AIR
DAMPER OUTPUT
14
Pilot Duty
Resistive
Amps
These thermostats are designed to control ON-OFF, N.O.
and N.C. valves, relays and three-wire floating valves. These
units may include a fan switch with one or more fan speed
selections.
SETBACK INPUT
MAIN 1 OPEN
Fan and system switches
Inductive
SECONDARY
1 OUTPUT
2ND STAGE
HEAT
AUTO: The thermostat automatically selects heating or cooling
mode depending on the set point and room temperature. The
appropriate HEAT or COOL indicator is enabled in addition to
AUTO. A 3°F dead-band is provided to prevent short cycling
between heating and cooling modes.
MAIN 1
OUTPUT
After change-over the control points automatically shift so that
the heating OFF-point or the cooling OFF-point equals the set
point temperature.
DEMAND
OUTPUT
COOL: The thermostat operates as a cooling-only thermostat.
The heating outputs are disabled.
OUTSIDE AIR
DAMPER OUTPUT
15
REMOTE PROBE
16
PIPE SENSOR
HEAT: The thermostat operates as a heating-only thermostat.
The cooling outputs are disabled.
If constructed without a mode button, the thermostat operates
in Auto mode, subject to configuration of the 2/4 pipe jumper
and pipe sensor input.
17
IM 1016-1 • MTB 158 MICROPROCESSOR THERMOSTAT
68
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1016 — MT158 B
Fan Speed Switch Operation
Service Menu
Fan speed is determined by manual selection from fan switch
OFF to HIGH, MEDIUM and/ or LOW. In units with the Cycling
Fan Option (demand output), the Fan operation (CYCLING vs.
CONTINUOUS) is determined by application connections. In
OFF position all outputs are off and display blank.
Access: Press UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows for 5 seconds.
A first touch of either arrow will display the set point (a single
set point is employed for both heating and cooling). Continued
pressure on either arrow will scroll the set point to new values.
After three seconds with no pressure on either arrow, the
selected set point becomes effective and the display of the
room temperature resumes.
Setback Operation
Connection of the Setback Input to 24 VAC 1 will force the
control into unoccupied mode (see wiring diagram). Pressing
an arrow key or the mode button on the thermostat cover will
disable the setback input for one hour.
Adjust Value: Use UP▲ or DOWN▼ arrow.
Table 3: Service Menu Functions
Item #
Function
Range
1
Zone Temp Offset
-5.1°F to 5.1°F
0°F
2
Valve Stroke Time
30 sec. to 5 min.
120 sec.
3
Fan Delay to OFF
0 to 10 min.
0 sec.
4
Compressor
Minimum OFF
Time
30 sec. to 10 min.
120 Sec.
5
Purge Cycle
0 = Time Based
1
1 = Temperature
Based
Figure 3: Circuit Board Jumpers
ON
10 11 12 13
15 16 17
5 6 7
Outside Air Damper Operation
This output is ON any time the control is turned ON.
Application Notes
1. When no pipe sensor is used the main output controls
cooling and the secondary output controls heating.
J P1
Three Wire Floating Valve Operation
Open and Close outputs are used to position the valve.
Stroke time is factory set at two minutes. Outputs are off after
reaching full on or off position. Valves are periodically reset for
accuracy.
2 3 4 5 6
J P4
AUTO
1
DIP S WIT C H
Pipe Sensor Operation
If cold water is detected, the system will operate in summer
mode and the Main output will be cooling. If hot water is
detected, the system will operate in winter mode, the Main
output will be heating and First Stage Secondary Output will be
disabled. In the case of an ambiguous reading, neither hot nor
cold, the thermostat will initiate a purge cycle.
Default
1 2 3 4
Up/ Down Arrow Operation
Menu Selection: Select 1 to 5 by pressing the mode button or
by pressing the UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows simultaneously.
Table 4: Circuit Board Jumper Configuration
Jumper Designation
Jumper Installed ON
Jumper Removed
JP1
Local Sensing
Remote Sensing
JP4
2 Pipe System*
4 Pipe System
Power-Up Operating Sequence
Upon application of power, an MTA158 will go directly to
normal operation.
2. The pipe sensor should be mounted on the main coil
input for water system operation and in the main duct
system for forced air operation.
3. The set point and operating mode will be retained on a
loss of power.
4. When using either a remote probe or pipe sensor, run
wiring away from any electrical motors or power wiring.
IM 1016-1 (01/14)
©2014 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-369
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS70www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 1017 — MT168
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1017
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 910102992
Date: October 2013
MT 168 0-10 VDC/4-20mA Thermostat
Installation
DANGER
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE
THIS THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/ OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment,
disconnect power before installing or servicing. Use only
wiring with insulation rated for full thermostat operating
voltage. Use copper wire only. Insulate or wire-nut all unused leads. Any wiring, including the remote probe, may
carry the full operating voltage of the thermostat.
To avoid potential fire and/ or explosion do not use in
potentially flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Retain these instructions for future reference. You must
review your application and national and local codes to
ensure that your installation will be functional and safe.
CAUTION
Care should be used to avoid electrostatic discharge to
the microprocessor.
This unit has configuration dip switches and jumpers.
You may need to reconfigure the thermostat for your
application.
1. Install the thermostat with the two furnished mounting
screws to a standard 4-1/16" × 2-1/8" square device
box with a 2" × 4" adapter ring.
2. For wall installations, mount the thermostat on an
inside wall approximately 5 feet above the floor. The
location should provide circulation at average room
temperature. Avoid direct sunlight or sources of hot or
cold air in the room or wall.
3. Remove the cover. Mount thermostat base assembly
to the outlet box using screws provided. Tighten the
screws evenly but do not overtighten. Connect wires
per wiring diagram.
4. To use a remote sensor on units with local sensing
capability, remove jumper JP-1 to disable local
sensing. Failure to remove JP-1 will cause improper
operation of thermostat.
5. Connecting a jumper between terminals 16 and 17
will disable the secondary output and change the
main output to heat mode.
6. Connection of a 24 VAC set-back signal will force
the control into unoccupied mode (see diagram).
Pressing an arrow key or the mode buttons on the
thermostat cover will disable the setback input for
one hour.
7. Remove the LCD plastic protective film to complete
the installation. Reinstall the cover assembly. Install
cover locking screw provided.
IM 1017 Discharge Conversion Kit
8. Checkout: After wiring and installation are complete,
energize the system and check the operation. Adjust
the thermostat as necessary to complete at least one
cycle. Be sure the thermostat and all other equipment
are functioning correctly.
People and ideas you can trust.™
IM IM 1152-371
Addendum IM 1017 — MT168
Application Notes
Figure 1: Mounting
1. When no changeover pipe sensor is used, the main
output controls cooling and the secondary output controls
heating.
2. The fan output, terminal 12, is energized whenever there
is a demand for heating or cooling. This output can be
connected to a relay that can be used to provide fan
cycling to terminal 1.
Figure 2: Typical Wiring*
4. The set point and operating mode will be retained on a
loss of power.
L IN E V O LTA G E
C O N N E C T IO N S
3. The changeover pipe sensor should be mounted on the
main coil input for water system operation and in the
main duct system for forced air operation.
5. When using either a remote probe or pipe sensor, run
wiring away from any electrical motors or power wiring.
L1 (HOT)
1
2
LO FAN
3
MED FAN
4
HIGH FAN
OR SINGLE SPEED
5
24 VAC 1
6. The auxiliary heat output supplies a 24 VAC signal with
call for heat. This output is shipped configured for staged
heat.
L2 OR NEUTRAL
8. The damper output is ON when mode is AUTO, HEAT or
COOL. Damper is OFF in set back.
SETBACK
7
10
SECONDARY
0-10 VDC
1 OUTPUT
11
12
AUXILIARY
HEAT
OUTPUT
13
14
15
MAIN 1
0-10 VDC
OUTPUT
Thermostat Operation
FAN
OUTPUT
These thermostats are designed to control 0-10 VDC/4-0 mA
valves. These units may include a fan switch with one or more
fan speed selections.
DAMPER
OUTPUT
Mode Button Operation
OFF: All thermostat outputs are off, fan is still operational if
connected to a manual fan switch.
OPTIONAL REMOTE PROBE
16
17
OPTIONAL PIPE SENSOR
NOTE: Note: * Specific models may have fewer connections.
Electrical Ratings
Table 1: Fan switch (terminals 1-4) line voltage
connections
Inductive
Voltage
Rating
FLA
LRA
Resistive
Amps
AUTO: The thermostat automatically selects heating or cooling
mode depending upon the relationship of the setpoint and the
room temperature. The appropriate HEAT or COOL indicator
is enabled in addition to AUTO. A 3°F dead band is provided
to prevent short cycling between heating and cooling modes.
After changeover, the control points automatically shift so that
the heating OFF-point equals the set point temperature or the
cooling OFF-point equals the set point temperature.
COOL: The thermostat operates as a cooling only thermostat.
The heating outputs are disabled.
Pilot
Duty
Thermostatic
Switching
24 VAC
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
24 VA
10 VA
120 VAC
5.8
34.8
6.0
125 VA
NA
240 VAC
2.9
17.4
5.0
125 VA
NA
277 VAC
2.4
14.4
4.2
125 VA
NA
IM 1017 • MT 168 0-10 VDC/4-20mA THERMOSTAT
72
7. The thermostat is shipped with all dip switches in the
“ON” (closed) position.
24 VAC
XFMR
24 VAC 2
6
L O W V O LTA G E
C O N N E C T IO N S
FAN
HEAT: The thermostat operates as a heating-only thermostat.
The cooling outputs are disabled.
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1017 — MT168
Fan Speed Switch Operation
Service Menu:
Fan speed is determined by manual selection from fan switch
OFF to HIGH, MEDIUM and/or LOW. In the OFF position, all
outputs are off and the display is blank.
Access: Press UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows for 5 seconds.
Up/Down Arrow Operation
Adjust Value: Use UP▲ or DOWN▼ arrow.
A first touch of either arrow will display the setpoint (a single
set point is employed for both heating and cooling). Continued
pressure on either arrow will scroll the setpoint to new values.
After three consecutive seconds on either arrow, the selected
setpoint becomes effective and the display of the room
temperature resumes.
Menu Selection: Select 1 to 5 by pressing the mode button or
by pressing the UP▲ and DOWN▼ arrows simultaneously.
Table 4: Service Functions
Item #
Function
Range
1
Zone Temp Offset
-5.1 °F to 5.1 °F
°0 F
2
Valve Stroke Time
30 sec. to 5 min.
120 sec.
3
Fan Delay to OFF
2 to 10 min.
120 sec.
Configuration
4
Compressor
Minimum OFF
Time
30 sec. to 10 min.
120 sec.
Table 2: Circuit Board Jumper Configuration
5
Purge Cycle
Jumper
Closed ON*
Open OFF
JP1
Local Sensing
Remote Sensing
4 Pipe System
JP2
2 Pipe System
JP3
Factory Use Only
JP4
0-10 VOC
Main Output
4-20 mA
Main Output
JP5
0-10 VOC
Secondary Output
4-20 mA
Secondary Output
0 = time based
1 = temperature
based
Default
1
Table 3: Dip Switch Configuration
Switch
Closed ON*
1
Not Use
Open OFF
Not Used
2
Staged Heat 3°F Diff.
(Term. 13)
Aux. Heat No Diff. (Term.
13)
3
°F Display
°C Display
4
Main & Sec. Outputs
0-10 VOC (Term. 10 &
11) requires JP4 & JP5
Main & Sec. Outputs
4-20 mA (Term. 10 & 11)
Remove JP4 & JP5
5
Operating Position
Not Used
6
Setback= 90°F & 50°F
Setback = 85°F & 60°F
Note: * On is with the dip switch handle to the right. See diagram.
Figure 3: Circuit Board
IM 1017 (10/13)
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-373
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS74www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 846
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 910102993
Date: October 2013
T170 Thermostat
24 VAC/120–277 VAC
3-Speed Fan Control (Continuous or Cycling) or Staged Fan Control
WARNING
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE, OR
SERVICE THIS THERMOSTAT, CAREFULLY READ
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH,
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
To avoid potential fire and/or explosion, do not use in
potentially flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Retain these instructions for future reference. This
product, when installed, is part of an engineered system
whose specifications and performance characteristics are
not designed or controlled by Daikin. You must review
your application and national and local codes to assure
that your installation is functional and safe.
US
DANGER
Hazardous voltage. To avoid electrical shock or damage
to equipment, disconnect power before installing or
servicing.
IM 846 T 170 Thermostat
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or
serious injury.
IM IM 1152-375
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Installation
Thermostat Model and Part Number
Daikin offers two different thermostats depending on the fan
speed control used (Table 1).
The thermostat base mounts to a field provided 4" × 4" outlet
box with a 2" × 4" mud ring (Figure 1). The thermostat cover
assembly mounts to the thermostat base.
1. Disconnect power before installing or servicing.
2. Run line voltage wiring (and low voltage wiring if
applicable) into the field provided outlet box and mud
ring (Figure 1).
Table 1: Thermostat model and part numbers
Model Number
Part Number
Fan Speed Control
TA170-001
107345335
3-Speed Fan Control
TB170-001
107345336
Staged Fan
3. Locate all connections within the mud ring/connection
box and wire nut all unused wires.
Note – For a list of thermostat features, refer to ED 3611.
4. Remove the thermostat cover assembly from its base to
gain access to the circuit board (Figure 2).
Optional Occupancy Detection Sensors/
Kits
In addition to the T170 thermostat, Daikin offers optional
occupancy detection sensors that can be ordered and used
in conjunction with the thermostat. When ordering, use the
associated kit number(s)
Table 2: Occupancy sensor model and kit numbers
Model Number
Kit Number
SA200-001
6677877211
SB200-001
6677877311
SD200-001
6677877411
SB200-002
6677877511
5. On the circuit board, set the voltage selection switch
(Figure 2) to the appropriate voltage for the application
• 24 V = 24 VAC
• 110–277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC.
NOTE: The circuit board is shipped with the voltage selection
switch in the 110-227 V position. For 24 VAC use, the
switch must be in the 24 V position.
6. The circuit board is also equipped with configuration
jumpers (JP1, JP3, and JP4 in Figure 2). Depending on
the application, it may be necessary to reconfigure the
following jumpers:
• JP4: 2/4 Pipe Sensor Jumper - This jumper selects
between 2-pipe (jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF)
operation (Fan Operation).
Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat
• JP3: Door/Window Switch Jumper - This jumper is
shipped normally open. Placement of a jumper allows
for occupancy detection and door/window switch only
operation (Optional Occupancy Detection Equipment
Operation).
CAUTION
Before applying power, the voltage selection switch must be in
the appropriate position. Failure to select the correct voltage
can cause thermostat malfunction or permanently damage
the thermostat.
• JP1: Removal of this jumper allows the sensor to be
located in a remote location.
CAUTION
7. Connect the color coded thermostat wires (Figure 3) to
the line voltage wires located in the mud ring/connection
box and secure the connections with wire nuts.
To use a remote sensor on units with local sensing capability,
remove jumper JP1 to disable local sensing. Failure to remove
JP1 can cause improper operation of the thermostat with a
remote probe installed.
CAUTION
Use copper wire only. Insulate or wire nut all unused leads.
Avoid electrostatic discharge to the thermostat. Failure to do
so can cause thermostat malfunction or permanently damage
the thermostat.
8. Install the thermostat base to the mud ring/outlet box
using two furnished mounting screws. Tighten the screws
evenly but do not over tighten.
NOTE: An output ratings chart (Table 3) is located on the
inside of the base.
9. With the base now secured, verify that the circuit board is
firmly snapped into the cover and is not dislodged.
10. Install the cover assembly to the base, pressing firmly to
engage the cover locking snaps.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage. Combined load current is not to exceed
20 amps. Mount only to a grounded metallic box. Low voltage
wiring is Class 2. To avoid electrical shock or damage to
equipment, disconnect power before installing or servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or
serious injury.
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
76
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Figure 1: Mounting the thermostat
Table 3: Output ratings
4 × 4 outlet box
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the unit,
make all wiring connections
inside the box.
Inductive
FLA
LRA
Resistive
Amps
Pilot Duty
HP
24 VAC
NA
NA
NA
24 VA
NA
120 VAC
5.8
34.8
6.0
125 VA
1/4
240 VAC
2.9
17.4
5.0
125 VA
1/4
277 VAC
2.4
14.4
4.2
125 VA
1/4
Voltage
Operation
2 × 4 mud ring
Thermostat Button Operation
The thermostat interface (Figure 4) contains buttons for
use in navigating to accompanying menus/screens and for
performing specific operations. These buttons and operations
are described below.
Cover locking snaps
(both sides)
Base
Cover assembly
Figure 4: Thermostat interface (model #TA170-001
shown)
Figure 2: Circuit board
MODES:
AUTO
UP/DOWN
ARROW
BUTTONS
COOL
HEAT
JP4
OFF
JP3
JP1
SYSTEM
BUTTON
Voltage Selection Switch
FAN
BUTTON
SPEED
BUTTON
or
F/C
BUTTON
(part #107345336)
Figure 3: Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
THERMOSTAT CONNECTIONS
LOW VOLTAGE
LINE VOLTAGE
Remote Probe
White/Yellow
Circuit Common
White/Violet
Pipe Sensor
White/Blue
White/Brown
White/Red
White/Orange
Brown
OFF—All thermostat outputs are off. The fan is still operational
if FAN ON is selected.
AUTO—The thermostat automatically selects heating
or cooling mode depending on the set point and room
temperature. If demand exists, the appropriate HEAT or COOL
icon illuminates. A 3°F dead band is provided to prevent short
cycling between heating and cooling modes. After changeover,
the control point automatically shifts so that the control OFF
point equals the set point temperature.
L2 / NEUTRAL
Yellow
Red
The System button (Figure 4) contains and displays the
following modes of operation:
Accessories
Available
from
SUNNE CONTROLS
Occupancy Detector
White/Gray
Blue
System Button Operation
Setback Input/ door Switch
White/black
Cool
(Main Output)
Heat
(Secondary Output)
Fan Low
Fan Medium
OUTPUTS
See Ratings
COOL—The thermostat operates as a cooling only thermostat.
Fan High
HEAT—The thermostat operates as a heating only thermostat.
Outside Air
Black
www.DaikinApplied.com
L1
3
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
IM IM 1152-377
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Up/Down Arrow Button Operation
4. Use the Up▲ and Down▼ arrow buttons (Figure 4) to
increase or decrease the temperature.
Fan Button Operation
Use the Fan button (Figure 4) to control operation of the fan.
In the ON position, the fan output operates continuously. In
the AUTO position, the output cycles with demand. In the OFF
position, all outputs are off.
Thermostat Menu Functions
The thermostat menu contains nine functions which can be
accessed using controls on the thermostat. Accessing the
menu functions and details of each function are described
below.
Menu Function Access
1. Press and hold the UP and DOWN arrow buttons (Figure
5) for five seconds.
2. The current display clears and the number “1” appears.
NOTE: Model #TB170-001 (part #107345336) has staged fan
control.
3. 3 Press the SYSTEM button to scroll to the next item
number.
Speed Button Operation (TA170-001)
The fan Speed button (Figure 4) for model #TA170-001 (part
#107345335) is determined by manually selecting HI, MED, or
LO. Press and hold the Speed button for five seconds to toggle
the displayed temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius.
4. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to make changes within
the selected number.
Figure 5: Thermostat menu
HOLD BOTH
FOR
5 SECONDS
F/C Button Operation (TB170-001)
Model #TB170-001 (part #107345336) is configured for
staged fan control and therefore utilizes a F/C button (Figure
4) instead of a Speed button. When pressed, the F/C button
toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
STEP
THROUGH
SELECTIONS
AND
SYSTEM
Verifying Thermostat Operation
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT
To verify thermostat operation after mounting and wiring it,
perform the following:
1. Energize the system.
1
F/C Display Selection
2
Continuous Set Point Display
3
Fan Off Delay
4
Range Limit Lo
5
Range Limit High
6
Setback Heat
7
Setback Cool
8
Zone Temperature Offset
9
Key Pad Lockout
1. F/C (Fahrenheit/Celsius) display selection: When this
function is selected, the F and C icons appear and the
selected icon flashes. To toggle between F or C, press
the up or down arrow button.
2. Set the fan to ON.
3. Select each fan speed, if available, to verify operation.
4. Set the system button to AUTO or other available selection.
2. Continuous set point display: When this function is
selected, the F or C icon, current digits, and the set
point icon appear. If the Continuous set point display is
enabled, the set point icon flashes. To toggle between
continuous display of set point and display of zone
temperature, press the up or down arrow button.
5. Using the UP▲ arrow, adjust the temperature to more
than 5°F above ambient temperature to cycle on heating.
6. Using the DOWN▼ arrow, adjust the temperature to more
than 5°F below ambient temperature to cycle on cooling.
3. FAN OFF delay: When this function is selected, the
FAN, OFF, and digits appear. The digits represent the
number of seconds the fan stays on after the heating and
cooling outputs are turned off. To increase or decrease
the value from 0–255 seconds, press the up or down
arrow button.
4. Range limit low: When this function is selected, the
current minimum range setting, the SET POINT icon and
the LO icon appear. To increase or decrease the value,
press the up or down arrow button.
5. Range limit high: When this function is selected,
the current maximum temperature range adjustment,
SET POINT icon, and LO icon appear. To increase or
decrease the value, press the up or down arrow button.
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
78
4
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
6. Set back heat: When this function is selected, the
current temperature range adjustment, the SET BACK
icon, and the HEAT icon appear. To increase or decrease
the value, press the up or down arrow button.
Fan Operation
7. Set back cool: When this function is selected, the
current Cool setback value, the SET BACK icon, and the
COOL icon appear. To increase or decrease the value,
press the up or down arrow button.
Standard Fan Configuration (TA170-001)
The thermostat may be factory configured for standard or
staged fan operation.
Units with standard fan operation (Figure 7) have a selectable
fan Speed button.
8. Zone temperature offset: When this function is
selected, the numeric ones and tenths (0.0) appear with
a leading minus sign. To increase or decrease the value
+/– 9°F, press the up or down arrow button. Increments
are made in 1°F and 0.5°C.
Figure 7: Standard fan operation
STANDARD FAN OPERATION
FAN ON: Fan is on continuously.
FAN AUTO: Fan cycles on with demand.
-4 F
-3 F
TEMPERATURE DEMAND - COOL
-2 F
-1 F
1F
Set Point
9. Keypad lockout: When this function is selected, the ON
and OFF icons appear. The enabled icon flashes. OFF
is the default. ON disables the keypad except for entry
into the service menu. To increase or decrease the value,
press the up or down arrow button.
SPEED: Fan speed is
selected by the user.
TEMPERATURE DEMAND - HEAT
2F
3F
4F
FAN AUTO: Fan cycles on with demand.
NOTE: In the event of a power failure, these values are
stored and can be recalled.
FAN ON: Fan is on continuously.
Staged Fan Configuration (TB170-001)
Condensate Overflow Interrupt
The remote probe input can be used with a condensate
overflow switch (CO), either in conjunction with a remote probe
(normally closed CO switch, Figure 6), or with local sensing
(normally open CO switch, Figure 6). When the condensate
switch activates, the thermostat displays a service wrench icon
and disables all outputs.
Factory configuration is available for staged fan operation
(Figure 8) to provide occupant comfort while using the most
effective fan speed.
Figure 8: Staged fan operation
STAGED FAN OPERATION
FAN HIGH
Figure 6: Local and remote probe installation
FAN MEDIUM
FAN LOW
Local Sensor Installation
TEMPERATURE DEMAND - COOL
Control
OFF
Remote Probe
White/Yellow
Circuit Common
White/Violet
-5 F
-3 F
-2F
-1 F
System
ON
SET
POINT
1F
2F
3F
FAN ON: Fan stays at lowest speed.
Normally Open
Condensate Switch
4F
5F
FAN LOW
FAN MEDIUM
FAN HIGH
Controlled Off Factory Configuration
A factory configuration may be provided for minimum heating
and cooling requirements. Using this configuration, the HEAT
and COOL outputs are automatically cycled on at the heat
setback limit. Your thermostat may not have this feature.
Remote Probe
White/Yellow
www.DaikinApplied.com
-4 F
System
ON
TEMPERATURE DEMAND - HEAT
Remote Probe Installation
Circuit Common
White/Violet
FAN ON: Fan stays at lowest speed.
Normally Closed
Condensate Switch
5
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
IM IM 1152-379
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Fan Coil Operation
5. After the three minute purge cycle occurs, the thermostat
checks to see if the water temperature is more than 15°F
from the set point, or above 80°F, or below 60°F.
Fan Coil operation is either a 2-pipe or 4-pipe configuration
which is determined by jumper selection JP4 (Mounting and
Wiring the Thermostat).
If yes, normal HVAC operation occurs.
If no, the valve is left open and the thermostat continues
to search for a valid reading.
2-Pipe Operation
In this configuration, the thermostat permanently disables
the secondary output and disables the fan from cycling in an
invalid mode. The main output configuration is dependent
on the pipe sensor input. With a pipe sensor connected, the
thermostat automatically selects heating or cooling depending
on the sensed water temperature. If the pipe sensor input is
open (unconnected), the main output only cools. If the pipe
sensor input is shorted, the main output only heats. Normal
thermostat default is for 4-pipe operation. For 2-pipe operation,
install a jumper on JP4.
NOTE: If at any time the demand goes away, the thermostat
will stop the purge cycle.
Table 4 shows output operation, depending on the sensed
water temperature.
Table 4: Output operation
2-Pipe/4-Pipe
Selection
In this configuration, both the main output (COOL) and the
secondary output (HEAT) are available. These both cycle ON
depending on the mode of the thermostat. With a pipe sensor
connected, the thermostat automatically changes the main
output to heat and disables the secondary output if the main coil
water is hot. For 4-pipe operation, the JP4 jumper is removed.
Purge Cycle
With a pipe sensor connected, the thermostat initiates a
purge cycle if the sensed water temperature is ambiguous
(not adequately hot or cold). The sequence for purge cycle
operation is as follows:
Secondary
Output
Cold
The fan does not
cycle ON with a
heat demand.
Hot
The fan does not
cycle ON with a
cool demand.
Disabled
Cooling
Heating
2-pipe
Cold
Heating only
4-pipe
JP4 OFF
Disabled
Heating only
JP4 ON
Pipe Sensor Operation
Pipe sensor input—use a 10K Remote Probe or a standard
ON-OFF Aquastat for summer/winter changeover.
Output Operation
Main Output
Cooling only
4-Pipe Operation
A pipe sensor can be connected when the thermostat is
configured for either 2-pipe or 4-pipe configuration. The pipe
sensor is used to determine the water temperature in the main
coil, which should be connected to the primary output.
Water
Temperature
Hot
The fan does not
cycle ON with a
cool demand.
Disabled
Setback Operation
In this configuration, the low level switch input normally is
open. To enable setback operation, the JP3 jumper is removed
(Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat). The input will close and
the thermostat heating and cooling setback limits can then be
used as temperature control points. Fan operation in setback
is cycled with demand. Press any thermostat key to override
setback for one hour. Setback overrides any user setting except
if the control is turned to OFF.
1. The thermostat has a call for heat or cooling.
NOTE: If at any time the call goes away, the thermostat stops
the purge cycle.
2. The thermostat checks the pipe sensor to verify water
temperature.
3. If the water temperature is beyond 15°F of the set point,
normal HVAC control occurs.
4. If the water temperature is not beyond 15°F of the
set point, the thermostat checks to see if the water
temperature is above 80°F or below 60°F.
If yes, normal HVAC control occurs.
If no, the thermostat opens the main output (COOL) for
three minutes.
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
80
6
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
Optional Occupancy Detection Equipment Operation
The T170 thermostat can be used with optional S200 series
occupancy detection equipment. Purchasing and installing
this equipment to compliment the thermostat adds energy
savings by setting back HVAC operation during occupied and
unoccupied times. Optional detection equipment configurations
and operation are described below.
SB200-001 Occupancy Sensor
The SB200-001 occupancy sensor (Figure 9) serves as an
occupancy sensor for automatic control of a guest room HVAC
system. It incorporates an innovative dual delay processor
which allows the sensor to verify the nature of occupancies,
and is capable of eliminating unnecessary actuations of the
HVAC device due to unintentional passages or short time
occupancies. The sensor may also serve as a slave sensor
(Figure 11).
Operation
In an occupied mode, the thermostat operates normally
and looks for a door open signal. When the door opens, the
thermostat waits for a door close signal. If the door is open for
more than two minutes, the thermostat turns the HVAC system
outputs to OFF. During this two minute period, if any button
is pressed on the keypad, the time delay is extended to ten
minutes. The time delay can only be extended once. Once the
HVAC outputs transition to OFF, a door closure is required to
re-enable the outputs. When the door closes, the thermostat
starts a two minute timer and tries to detect occupancy. If the
timer expires and no occupancy is detected, the thermostat
transitions to an unoccupied state. If occupancy is detected
while the timer is running, the thermostat will remain in the
occupied mode.
In an unoccupied mode, the thermostat sets heating and cooling
set points to setback values as determined by factory or user
settings. The fan is automatically set to cycle with demand. The
thermostat continually monitors the occupancy sensor and will
enter into occupied mode if occupancy is detected.
The sensor switch is open in occupied mode and closed in
unoccupied mode. An optional door and/or window switch
(Figure 9) is open when the door/window is open and is closed
when the door/window is closed.
NOTE: To use this configuration, a jumper must be installed
to JP3 to allow occupancy input.
If the installation is only using a door/window switch, the
thermostat will disable the HVAC outputs if this output is open
for longer than two minutes.
An optional door and/or window switch (Figure 9) can
be added for use with the SB200-001 sensor.
To enable door/window switch only operation, install a jumper to
JP3 (Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat) and the occupancy
input must be shorted to circuit common.
Figure 9: Optional equipment configuration #1
www.DaikinApplied.com
7
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
IM IM 1152-381
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
SD200-001 Occupancy Sensor
The SD200-001 occupancy sensor (Figure 10) serves as a
master sensor for a guest room HVAC management system.
The sensor provides HVAC operation according to occupancy
status, as well as door/window switch monitoring, selectable
high/low temperature setback, form-C output, slave sensor
connectivity, and a five minute door open HVAC shut-off.
NOTE: To use this configuration, the jumper to JP3 is
removed to allow setback input.
An optional door and/or window switch (Figure 10)
and slave sensor can be added for use with the
SD200-001 sensor.
Operation
In an occupied mode, the SD200-001 occupancy sensor
(Figure 10) and door switch use advanced microprocessor
logic to determine occupancy. A door open signal will initiate
occupancy status detection. If the sensor determines that a
room is occupied, it will allow normal HVAC control. The sensor
will wait for another door open signal before determining
occupancy again.
In an unoccupied mode, the sensor continually monitors
the room. Any occupancy detection will set the operation to
occupied mode.
Figure 10: Optional equipment configuration #2
IM 846 • T 170 THERMOSTAT
82
8
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 846 — MT170
SD200-002 Occupancy Sensor
The SD200-002 occupancy sensor serves as a stand alone
master sensor for a guest room HVAC management system.
The sensor provides HVAC operation according to occupancy
status, as well as selectable high/low temperature setback,
form-C output, and a five minute door open HVAC shut-off.
This system provides basic room setback and is ideal for
control of HVAC in commercial spaces.
Operation
With each occupancy detection, an OFF delay is started and
can be set to delay for up to 30 minutes.
NOTE: To use this configuration, the jumper to JP3 is
removed to allow setback input.
Figure 11: Optional equipment configuration #3
IM 846 (10/13)
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-383
Addendum Material
IM 1152-3 • HORIZONTAL FAN COILS84www.DaikinApplied.com
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1019
Group: Fan Coil
Part Number: IM 1019
Date: October 2011
MT 180 Programmable Thermostat
IM IM 1152-385
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
Table of ConTenTs
Table of ConTenTs
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Technical and Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Applications and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Standard Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Thermostat Model and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Staged Fan Operation with
Temperature Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Optional Sensors/Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fancoil Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installing, Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat . . . 5
Pipe Sensor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Purge Cycle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front Panel Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Time-Based Purge (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Display Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HVAC Setback Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setback Operation - Remove JP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Up/Down Arrow Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
System Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fan Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Program Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Door Switch Only Operation - Install JP3 . . . . . . . 14
Optional Occupancy Detection
Equipment Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Occupancy Operation (Install JP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operation from an Occupied Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting the Clock & Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operation from an Unoccupied Mode . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting the Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SB200-001 Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Copy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SD200-001 Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Thermostat Configuration/ Service Menu . . . . . . . . . 10
Programming Time & Temperature Settings . . . . . . 10
Custom Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Time & Temperature Programming Example . . . . 11
SD200-002 Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Annex I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Annex II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overriding the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
System Check-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Condensate Overflow Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
86
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
InsTallaTIon InsTruCTIons
InsTallaTIon InsTruCTIons
WARNING
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL, OPERATE OR SERVICE THIS
THERMOSTAT.
Failure to observe safety information and comply with
instructions could result in PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
Applications and Features
For 2 or 4 Pipe Fan Coil and ON/OFF Control
Applications
• 7 Day, 4 Event Programmability
• System Selection: OFF-Heat-Cool-Auto-Setback
• 6 Outputs: 1H, 1C, Up to 3 Fan, OA Damper
To avoid electrical shock or damage to equipment, disconnect
power before installing or servicing and use only wiring with
insulation rated for full thermostat operating voltage.
Before installing this control, the Voltage Selection Switch
must be placed in the correct position. See instructions. To
avoid potential fire and/or explosion do not use in potentially
flammable or explosive atmospheres.
• Fan Control: 1-3 Speeds
— Cycling (Auto) or Continuous (ON)
— Automatic Fan Speed Staging (TB180 models only)
Connections for:
• Fan Coil Pipe Sensor
• Remote Temperature Probe
Retain these instructions for future reference. This product,
when installed, will be part of an engineered system whose
specifications and performance characteristics are not
designed or controlled by PECO. You must review your
application and national and local codes to assure that your
installation will be functional and safe.
• Occupancy Control
• Door Switch or Setback
• Condensate Overflow
CAUTION
• Use copper wire only, insulate or wire nut all unused
leads.
• Care should be used to avoid electrostatic discharge to
the T180 thermostat.
• This unit has configuration jumpers. You may need to
reconfigure this thermostat for your application
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
3
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-387
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
InsTallaTIon InsTruCTIons
Specifications
Thermostat Model and Part Number
Table 1: MT180 Programmable Thermostat Specifications
Daikin offers two different 7-Day Programmable Digital
Heating/Cooling Thermostat with constant fan or Fan cycled,
On/Off Valve Control depending on the fan speed control used
(See Table 2).
Temperature Set Point Range
50 to 90°F / 10 to 32°C
Differential
1°
Memory – Back-Up
EEPROM, No batteries required,
Stores settings for unlimited time
Mounting
Installs on standard 4" × 4" device box
with a 2" × 4" horizontal mud ring
Model Number
Part Number
Fan Speed Control
Physical Dimensions
4.4"(h) × 5.8"(w) × 1.1"(d)
TA180-001
910119110
3-speed fan control
Agency Approvals
UL, UL Canada
TB180-001
910119111
Staged fan control
Electrical Ratings
(see Ratings table)
Figure 1: MT180 Programmable Thermostat Dimensions
Table 2: Thermostat Model and Part Number
Optional Sensors/Kits
In addition to the T180 thermostat, Daikin offers optional
sensors for occupancy detection (page 14 and page 15) and
10K pipe sensor page 12) that can be ordered and used
in conjunction with the thermostat. Use the associated kit
number(s) provided in Table 3 when ordering.
Table 3: Sensor Model and Kit Numbers
Sensor Model Number
Occupancy Detection
Sensor
6677877311
SD200-001
6677877411
SD200-002
6677877511
10K Pipe Sensor
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
88
4
Daikin Part Number
SB200-001
107201601
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
InsTallaTIon InsTruCTIons
Installing, Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat
CAUTION
Figure 3: Circuit Board
Before applying power, the voltage selection switch must be in
the appropriate position. Failure to select the correct voltage
can cause thermostat malfunction or permanently damage
the thermostat.
CAUTION
To use a remote sensor on units with local sensing capability,
remove jumper JP1 to disable local sensing. Failure to remove
JP1 can cause improper operation of the thermostat with a
remote probe installed.
CAUTION
• Use copper wire only. Insulate or wire nut all unused
leads.
• Avoid electrostatic discharge to the thermostat.
• Failure to do so can cause thermostat malfunction or
permanently damage the thermostat.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage. Combined load current is not to exceed
20 amps. Mount only to a grounded metallic box. Low voltage
wiring is Class 2. To avoid electrical shock or Damage to
equipment, disconnect power before installing or servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or
serious injury
The thermostat should be used indoors only. It should be
mounted on an inner wall in a location with freely circulating
air, and where it will be responsive to changes in room
temperature. Avoid mounting near heat generating appliances
(i.e. TV, heater, refrigerator), or in direct sunlight.
The thermostat base mounts to a field provided 4” × 4” outlet
box with a 2” × 4” horizontal mud ring. The thermostat cover
assembly mounts to the thermostat base.
1. Disconnect power before installing or servicing.
Figure 2: Mounting the Thermostat
2. Run line voltage wiring (and low voltage wiring if
applicable) into the field provided outlet box and mud
ring (Figure 2).
3. Locate all connections within the mud ring/connection
box and wire nut all unused wires.
4. Remove the thermostat cover assembly from its base to
gain access to the circuit board (Figure 3).
5. On the circuit board, set the voltage selection switch
(Figure 3) to the appropriate position prior to application
of power.
• 24V = 24 VAC
• 110-277 V = 120, 240 or 277 VAC
NOTE: The circuit board is shipped with the voltage selection
switch in the 110-227 V position. For 24 VAC use, the
switch must be in the 24 V position
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
5
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-389
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
InsTallaTIon InsTruCTIons
6. The circuit board is also equipped with configuration
jumpers (JP1, JP3, and JP4 in Figure 3). Depending on
the application, it may be necessary to reconfigure the
following jumpers:
Figure 4: Wiring Diagram
JP1 Jumper Selection – Remote Temperature Sensor
Local Sensing – Install JP1
Remote Sensing – Remove JP1 – Accessory sensors
are available in standard 60” lengths but can be
extended to meet application requirements.
JP3 Jumper Selection – HVAC Setback Systems
The JP3 jumper allows the T180 to be configured for
Setback, Occupancy Detection or Door Switch Only
Occupancy Operations. For further descriptions of these
conditions please see the Technical and Application
Notes‚ page 12.
• Setback Operation - Remove JP3
• Occupancy Detection - Install JP3
• Door Switch Only - Install JP3
JP4 Jumper Selection – 2 or 4 Pipe Operation
Connection of a pipe sensor will change the operation of
the outputs as shown in Table 4. (See Technical Notes
for further information on Pipe Sensor Operation‚ page
12)
Table 4: Jumper Activation
• 2-Pipe Operation - Install JP4 - The thermostat will
permanently disable the Secondary Output and
disables system and fan invalid modes.
• 4-Pipe Operation - Remove JP4 - Both the Main
Output (COOL) and Secondary Output (HEAT) will be
available.
7. Connect the color coded thermostat wires (Figure 4) to
the line voltage wires located in the mud ring/connection
box and secure the connections with wire nuts.
JP4 Section
Pipe Sensor
Water Temp
Aqua Stat
Main Output
(Blue Wire)
Secondary
Output (Red
wire)
2-Pipe
Cold
Open
Cooling Only
Disabled
JP4-ON
Hot
Closed
Heating Only
Disabled
2-Pipe
Cold
Open
Cooling
Heating
JP4-OFF
Hot
Closed
Heating Only
Disabled
NOTE: *Fan will not cycle on for disabled modes.
Table 5: Output Ratings
8. Install the thermostat base to the mud ring/outlet box
using two furnished mounting screws. Tighten the screws
evenly but do not over tighten.
NOTE: Note: An output ratings chart (Table 5) is located on
the inside of the base.
Voltage
FLA
LRA
RES Amps
Pilot Duty
HP
24 VAC
NA
NA
NA
24 VA
NA
120 VAC
5.8
34.8
6.0
125 VA
¼
240 VAC
2.9
17.4
5.0
125 VA
¼
277 VAC
2.4
14.4
4.2
125 VA
¼
Combined Load Current Not to Exceed 20 Amps
9. With the base now secured, verify that the circuit board is
firmly snapped into the cover and is not dislodged.
10. Install the cover assembly to the base, pressing firmly to
engage the cover locking snaps.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
90
6
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
operaTIon
Front Panel Reference
Display Reference
Figure 5: MT180 Programmable Thermostat Interface
Figure 6: MT180 Programmable Thermostat Display
The thermostat interface (Figure 5) contains buttons for
use in navigating to accompanying menus/screens and for
performing specific operations. These buttons and operations
are described below.
1. System Mode Display (See Table 6)
2. Temperature Display (See Table 7)
3. Time and Day Display (See Table 8)
1. Liquid Crystal Display with a blue backlight
4. Programming Commands (See Table 9)
2. UP .and DOWN .Buttons
5. Time Period Indicators
WAKE, DAY, EVE, and SLEEP are the names given to
the four time periods per day. Each time period has its
own unique setpoint temperatures as shown in Table 15.
3. SYSTEM Button
4. FAN Button
5. PROGRAM Button.
6. Fan Operation Indicators (See Table 10)
7. Program Override Commands (See Table 11)
8. Service Indicator
The wrench symbol is displayed when there is a
temperature sensor error or condensate overflow error.
It indicates there is an open or a short connection to
the sensor switch. When this occurs, the thermostat will
disable all outputs and illuminate the wrench symbol.
A service technician should be called to determine the
cause of the error.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
7
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-391
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
Table 6: System Mode Display Overview
Menu
Description
HEAT
Indicates the system is in heating mode
COOL
Indicates the system is in cooling mode
AUTO
Indicates the system will automatically changeover between
heating and cooling modes as the room temperature varies
OFF
Saving Changes
As you navigate your thermostat, be aware of the thermostat’s
save and exit protocol:
• The thermostat automatically saves all the changes you
make, as you make them.
Turns OFF the entire system
• When you are in the SYSTEM or FAN menus:
Indicates the heating or cooling system is operating in setback
mode. Setback mode is an energy saving feature that can
be either manually activated by the thermostat’s user, or
automatically activated by an occupancy sensor or door switch
SETBACK
— If you push a button that is not applicable to the
current menu, all changes are saved and the
thermostat goes to the menu associated with the
button that was pushed.
Table 7: Temperature Display Overview
Menu
— If the thermostat is idle for five seconds, the
thermostat times out, saves all changes, and returns
to the thermostat’s default display.
Description
Default Display
Digits display the current room temperature
During Programming Digits are used to set the desired temperatures
• When you are in the PROGRAM menu:
Table 8: Time and Day Display Overview
Menu
— If you push a button that is not applicable to the
current menu, nothing happens (your programming is
not interrupted).
Description
Default Display
Digits indicate the current time, and day abbreviations
indicate the current day
— If the thermostat is idle for fifteen seconds, the
thermostat times out, saves all changes, and returns
to the thermostat’s default display.
During Programming Digits and days are used to program time periods
CLOCK
Lights up during programming when the clock is being
set
24Hr
Lights up during programming to indicate time will be
displayed in 24-hour clock format
AM/PM
Indicates 12-hour clock format
Table 9: Programming Commands Overview
Menu
Description
SET
Enters thermostat into custom program mode which allows you
to specify a unique times and temperatures for a particular day or
group of days
COPY
Simplifies programming by allowing you to copy all of an individual
day’s settings to another day or group of day
DFLT
Restores the thermostat to the factory program
Table 10: Fan Operation Indicators Overview
Menu
Description
FAN
“FAN” will be always be lit in conjunction with “ON” or “AUTO”
ON
Indicates constant, continuous fan operation
AUTO
Indicates fan is only on with heating or cooling demand
HI
Indicates high speed fan; always lit in conjunction with “ON” or
“AUTO”
M
Indicates medium speed fan; always lit in conjunction with “ON” or
“AUTO”
LO
Indicates low speed fan; always lit in conjunction with “ON” or
“AUTO”
Table 11: Program Override Commands Overview
Menu
Description
HOLD
Indicates thermostat is in manual operation. (Programmed
settings are OFF, but not lost)
HOLD HRS
During programming, lights up in conjunction with clock digits;
allows program to be put on hold for up to 24 hours
HOLD DAYS
During programming, lights up in conjunction with the clock
digits; allows program to be put on hold for up to 99 days
HOLD ON
Indicates thermostat is in permanent manual operation
OFF
Turns OFF the hold and resumes programmed settings
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
92
8
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
Up/Down Arrow Button Operation
Fan Button Operation
The ▲ and ▼ buttons function in two ways:
Pressing FAN will light up the six fan mode options described
below. Press FAN to scroll through the options. As you scroll,
the current option will be blinking. To select the blinking option,
wait for the five-second timeout, which saves your option and
returns you to the thermostat’s default display.
• When you are in the default display, you can press ▲
to increase, or ▼ to decrease, the current temperature
set-point. This will override programmed temperature
settings until the next programmed time period (Wake,
Day, Evening, or Sleep).
• When you are in the PROGRAM menu, you can press ▲
to scroll up, or ▼ to scroll down, through the menu, time,
and temperature options.
Table 13: Fan Button Operation Overview
System Button Operation
Pressing SYSTEM will light up the five system mode options
described below. Press SYSTEM to scroll through the options.
As you scroll, the current option will be blinking. To select the
blinking option, wait for the five-second timeout, which saves
your option and returns you to the thermostat’s default display.
Table 12: System Button Operation Overview
Menu
Description
HEAT
The thermostat operates as a Heating Only thermostat
COOL
The thermostat operates as a Cooling Only thermostat
AUTO
The thermostat automatically selects the appropriate Heat or Cool
mode depending upon the setpoint (desired temperature) and
zone temperature (actual temperature)
OFF
Turns the system OFF by disabling all thermostat outputs
Setback mode is an energy saving feature that minimizes the
heating and cooling when the room is not occupied. Setback
mode overrides the programmed time and temperature settings
by telling the thermostat to instead use the setback setpoint for
heating and cooling. The setback setpoint temperatures are
factory default or installer-selected during installation. During
setback mode, when a demand for heating or cooling exists, the
fan will run at the lowest speed.
SET BACK
Description
ON HI
High speed fan is on continuously, even if no demand for heating
or cooling exists
ON M
Medium speed fan is on continuously, even if no demand for
heating or cooling exists
ON LO
Low speed fan is on continuously, even if no demand for heating
or cooling exists
AUTO HI
High speed fan cycles with active demand for heating and
cooling
AUTO M
Medium speed fan cycles with active demand for heating and
cooling
AUTO LO
Low speed fan cycles with active demand for heating and
cooling
Program Button Operation
Function Overview
Pressing PROGRAM lights up five program mode options,
described below. Press ▲ or ▼ buttons to scroll through the
options. As you scroll, the current option will be blinking. To
select the blinking option, press PROGRAM again and you will
be taken to the menu associated with that option.
Table 14: Program Button Operation Overview
Menu
• Automatic setback mode: If your thermostat is connected
to an occupancy sensor or door switch, setback mode is
automatically turned on and off by the sensor or door switch.
• Manual setback mode: Select SETBACK in the SYSTEM
menu. Setback temperature settings will remain in effect until
you manually turn off setback mode. Selecting HEAT, COOL, or
AUTO in the SYSTEM menu will turn off setback and resume
your programmed time and temperature settings.
9
Description
CLOCK
Sets the current time and day.
°F / °C
Use this option to change the temperature display to Fahrenheit
or Celsius. Your thermostat’s default temperature display setting is
Fahrenheit.
SET
NOTE: SETBACK appears on your menu only if the thermostat’s
installer enabled this feature.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
Menu
Use to specify the time and temperature programming for a
particular day or group of days. Also allows you to reset the
thermostat to the factory default ENERGY STAR program.
COPY
Simplifies programming by allowing you to copy a particular day’s
program to another day or group of days.
HOLD
Puts the thermostat in manual operation for a permanent or
temporary time period. Overrides your programmed settings, but
does not lose them.
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-393
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
Setting the Clock & Day
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “CLOCK” is blinking. To
select, press PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll through “24Hr”, “AM”, “PM”
options. “24Hr” sets your thermostat to a 24-hour clock.
“AM” and “PM” sets your thermostat to a 12-hour clock.
To select your preference, press PROGRAM once.
4. Press▲ or▼ to scroll to the current hour. To select, press
PROGRAM once.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the current minute. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the current day. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
Your selections have been saved and you have exited program
mode. Your thermostat is ready to function with the factory
preprogrammed ENERGY STAR® program. If you want to
change the program for your particular needs, follow the
instructions in the “Programming Your Thermostat” section.
Setting the Temperature Display
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “°F °C” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
3. Both “°F” and “°C” will be lit, but only one will be blinking.
Press .or .to scroll so that the preferred option is blinking.
To select, press PROGRAM once.
Your selection has been saved and you have exited program
mode.
Thermostat Configuration/ Service
Menu
To enter the Service Menu press the UP and DOWN arrows
simultaneously for five (5) seconds. The current display icon
will be turned off.
Service menu number 1 will appear. Push the SYSTEM button
to move to the next Service Menu number. The UP and DOWN
arrow keys will scroll through your range of options for each
feature. All changes to the Service Menu are automatically
saved when the system times out. Please refer to the service
menu table (Annex II‚ page 17).
Programming Time & Temperature
Settings
Your thermostat’s programming feature allows you to divide
up a 24-hour day into four time periods (referred to as “Wake”,
“Day”, “Evening”, and “Sleep”), and give each time period its
own setpoint temperatures. Your “Heat Setpoint temperature”
tells your heating system the room temperature to maintain
during cold weather. The “Cool Setpoint Temperature” tells
your cooling system the room temperature to maintain during
hot weather.
Factory Program: Your thermostat comes from the factory
preprogrammed with all seven days of the week set to the
times and temperatures shown in Table 15.
Table 15: Factory Set-Up of Time & Temperature Settings
Copy Feature
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼to scroll until “COPY” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the individual day you want
to copy from. “DFLT” (the default Factory Program) is
also a copy option. To select your preference, press
PROGRAM once.
Time Period
Start Time
Heat Setpoint
Temperature
Cool Setpoint
Temperature
Wake
6:00 am
70° F (21.0° C)
78° F (25.5° C)
Day
8:00 am
62° F (16.5° C)
85° F (29.5° C)
Evening
6:00 pm
70° F (21.0° C)
78° F (25.5° C)
Sleep
10:00 pm
62° F (16.5° C)
72° F (22.0° C)
If the factory program meets your needs, simply follow the
“Setting the Clock & Day” instructions and you’re done.
If you want to change the preprogrammed times and/or
temperatures, follow the instructions under “Custom Program”.
4. Press ▲ or ▼to scroll to the day or group of days you
want to copy to. To select, press PROGRAM once.
Your selection has been saved and you have exited program
mode.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
94
10
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
Custom Program
Begin by planning your program. Use the “Custom Program
Worksheet” to plan your program time periods and
temperatures you want during each period. You must program
four periods for each day. Fill in the complete table, as it will
serve as a record of your programs, then follow this procedure:
1. Press PROGRAM once.
Time & Temperature Programming
Example
In this example, the thermostat user wants to program the
weekend with a different schedule from the Factory Program.
The user wants the Saturday and Sunday program to be
identical.
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “SET” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “SET” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the day or group of days
you want to program. To select your preference, press
PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “SASU” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “WAKE” is blinking. To
select, press PROGRAM once.
Day / Group of Days options are:
• To program each day individually, the abbreviations
are: “M” is Monday, “TU” is Tuesday, “W” is
Wednesday, “TH” is Thursday, “F” is Friday, “SA” is
Saturday, and “SU” is Sunday.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ .to scroll hours to “8:”. To select, press
PROGRAM once.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll minutes to “:30”. To select, press
PROGRAM once.
• “MTUWTHFSASU” allows you to give all 7 days of the
week the identical heating & cooling program.
7. User wants to keep same HEAT setpoint temperature. To
keep unchanged, press PROGRAM once.
• “MTUWTHF” allows you to give all 5 weekdays the
identical heating & cooling program.
• “SASU” allows you to give both weekend days the
identical heating & cooling program.
• “DFLT” restores all seven days of the week to the
original factory preprogrammed ENERGY STAR
program.
8. User wants to keep same COOL setpoint temperature.
To keep unchanged, press PROGRAM once.
Now you’re done setting up the Wake period, and ready to set
up the other three time periods for Saturday and Sunday:
• Program the Day period for SASU by repeating steps 1
through 8, but in Step 4, select “DAY”.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll through the four time periods. To
select your preference, press PROGRAM once.
• Program the Evening period for SASU by repeating steps
1 through 8, but in Step 4, select “EVE”.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the desired starting hour. To
select, press PROGRAM once.
• Program the Sleep period for SASU by repeating steps 1
through 8, but in Step 4, select “SLEEP”.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the desired starting minute. To
select, press PROGRAM once.
Now you’re done setting up all four time periods for SASU.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the desired HEAT setpoint
temperature. To select, press PROGRAM once.
8. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the desired COOL setpoint
temperature. To select, press PROGRAM once.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
11
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-395
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
operaTIon
Overriding the Program
Your thermostat’s HOLD feature allows you to put the
thermostat in manual operation for either a specified or
indefinite length of time. HOLD will override your programmed
settings, but does not lose them.
System Check-out
To verify thermostat operation after mounting and wiring it,
perform the following:
1. Energize the system.
Setting up a Temporary Hold
2. Set fan to ON. Select each fan speed (TA180 Models) to
verify operation.
You may set up a temporary hold by hours and/or days.
3. Set the System button to AUTO, or available selection.
4. Using the UP arrow, adjust temperature more than 5°F
above the room temperature to cycle on heating.
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “HOLD” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll through options. “DAYS” allows
you to specify 0-99 days hold; “HRS” allows you to
specify 0-24 hours hold. To select your preference, press
PROGRAM once.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to the desired length of time. To
select, press PROGRAM once.
The thermostat is now on hold for the time period you selected,
unless you decide to turn it OFF earlier. (See Turning OFF a
Hold.)
Setting up a Permanent Hold
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “HOLD” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to “ON”. To select, press
PROGRAM once.
5. Using the DOWN arrow adjust the temperature to 5°F
below room temperature to cycle on cooling.
NOTE: If the thermostat is set to utilize a time-based purge
cycle (Service menu 16), the thermostat will conduct
a 3-min purge on initial start-up if a pipe sensor is
connected.
Condensate Overflow Interrupt
The remote probe input can be used with a condensate
overflow interrupt switch (CO), either in conjunction with a
remote probe (normally closed CO switch) or with local sensing
(normally open CO switch). When the condensate switch
activates, the T180 will display the service wrench and disable
all outputs.
Figure 7: Remote Probe Installation
The thermostat is now on hold until you manually turn OFF the
hold. (See Turning OFF a Hold.)
Turning OFF a Hold
1. Press PROGRAM once.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll until “HOLD” is blinking. To select,
press PROGRAM once.
Figure 8: Local sensor installation
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to scroll to “OFF”. To select, press
PROGRAM once.
The thermostat will now resume your programmed time and
temperature settings.
For an easy planning refer to the Custom Program Worksheet
(Annex I‚ page 16).
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
96
12
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
TeChnICal and applICaTIon noTes
TeChnICal and applICaTIon noTes
Fan Operation
The thermostat may be factory configured for standard or
staged fan operation.
Standard Fan Operation
Single setpoint represented in Figure 9. Programming mode
includes multiple setpoints.
Figure 9: Standard Fan Operation
Speed: Fan speed is selected by User
Staged Fan Operation with Temperature
Demand
Single setpoint represented in Figure 10. Programming mode
includes multiple setpoints.
Figure 10: Staged Fan Operation
Temperature Demand - Cool
Temperature Demand - Cool
Fan High
Fan On: Fan is On continuously
Fan Medium
Fan Auto: Fan cycles On with demand
Fan On: Fan stays at lowest speed
Fan Low
-5°F
-4°F
-3°F
-2°F
-1°F Set Point
Fan Auto: Fan cycles On with demand
1°F
2°F
3°F
4°F
Control Off
5°F
-5°F
-4°F
-3°F
-2°F
System On
-1°F Set Point
System On
1°F
Control Off
2°F
3°F
4°F
5°F
Fan Low
Fan On: Fan is On continuously
Fan On: Fan stays at lowest speed
Fan Medium
Fan High
Temperature Demand - Heat
Table 16: Standard Fan Operation Overview
Menu
FAN ON
FAN AUTO
Description
Temperature Demand - Heat
Table 17: Staged Fan Operation with Temperature Demand
Overview
Fan is on continuously and is not dependant on a heat or cool
demand
Menu
Fan cycles on with a heat or cool temperature demand and
cycles off with the heat or cool output
FAN ON
FAN SPEED High, medium, or low is selected by the user
FAN AUTO
Description
Fan stages from high to medium to low and stays continuously
on in the lowest available speed
Fan stages from high to medium to low and cycles off at set
point
FAN SPEED selected by the thermostat program
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
13
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-397
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
TeChnICal and applICaTIon noTes
Fancoil Operation
Time-Based Purge (Default)
1. The time-based purge cycle will start a 3-min purge
cycle and enable the Main Output if any of the following
conditions occur: transition from OFF to AUTO mode,
Reset event, power cycle, and/or 1-hour timer expires.
Fancoil operation is either a 2-pipe or 4-pipe configuration
which is determined by jumper selection JP4 (see Installing,
Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat‚ page 4).
Pipe Sensor Operation
2. After the 3 min purge cycle, a pipe sensor reading says:
Pipe is 15°F+ below the zone temp = Summer mode
Pipe is 15°F+ above the zone temp = Winter mode Pipe
is within 15°F of zone temp = still Ambiguous
A pipe sensor can be connected when the thermostat is
configured for either 2-pipe or 4-pipe fan coil operation
(see JP4 jumper configuration). The Pipe sensor is used to
determine the water temperature in the Main Coil. The Pipe
Sensor should be mounted on the Main Coil supply and
wrapped with insulating material.
3. If a Winter or Summer mode is determined, the
appropriate heating/cooling occurs. The thermostat will
purge and check pipe temperatures again after 1-hour.
Pipe Sensor Input: 10K Remote Probe or a standard On-Off
Aqua-stat can be used for summer/winter changeover. ON
(closed) is winter heating mode and OFF (open) is summer
cooling mode.
Purge Cycle Operation
With a pipe sensor connected, this thermostat will initiate a
purge cycle if the sensed water temperature is ambiguous
(not adequately hot or cold). The purge cycle algorithm
can be either temperature or time based, depending on the
configuration of Service Menu 16.
Temperature-Based Purge
• When an Ambiguous mode is detected and a demand
exists, a 3 minute purge timer begins and the Main
Output is opened.
• After the 3 minute purge cycle, the thermostat checks
again to see if the water temperature is more than 15°F
from set point, or above 80°F or below 60°F.
• If Winter or Summer mode is determined, normal HVAC
operation occurs. If still ambiguous, the thermostat
checks to see if the COIL temperature is below 60°F or
above 80°.
— Coil < 60°F = Summer Mode.
• If step 2 is still ambiguous, all thermostat outputs are
disabled for 1 hour.
• After 1 hour, the purge cycle resumes at step 1.
HVAC Setback Systems
Setback Operation - Remove JP3
This is a low level input that is normally open. When switch is
closed, the T180 heating and cooling setback limits are used
as temperature control points. Fan operation in setback is
cycled with demand. Pressing any button will override setback
for 1 hour. Setback will override any user setting unless control
is turned to OFF.
Intelligent Occupancy Sensors like the SD200-001 and SD200002 can be used with this input to set the HVAC system to
control at setback limits.
Door Switch Only Operation - Install JP3
A stand alone door or window switch can be connected to the
T180 to disable the HVAC system (outputs) if a door or window
is left open for more than 2 minutes. A one-time ten minute
override can be initiated by pressing any thermostat key pad.
— Coil > 80°F = Winter mode.
• Purge Cycle is repeated until a non-ambiguous condition
is sensed.
NOTE: If at any time the demand goes away, the thermostat
will abort the purge cycle.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
98
14
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
opTIonal oCCupanCy deTeCTIon equIpmenT operaTIon
opTIonal oCCupanCy deTeCTIon equIpmenT operaTIon
The T180 thermostat can be used with optional S200 series
occupancy detection equipment. Purchasing and installing this
equipment to compliment the thermostat adds energy savings
by setting back HVAC operation during occupied and
unoccupied times.
Occupancy Operation (Install JP3)
The T180 can be used with PECO S200 series occupancy
detection equipment. The occupancy and switch inputs are
designed to connect to the SB200 slave sensor and SE200
door switch.
The Occupancy Sensor is a low-level switch that is open when
there is occupancy and closed when unoccupied.
The Door Switch is a low-level switch that is open when the
door is open and closed when the door is closed. This system
requires both an Occupancy Sensor and a Door Switch.
Operation from an Unoccupied Mode
In an Unoccupied State, the T180 sets heating and cooling set
points to setback values, as determined in the service menu. In
this mode, the fan is automatically set to cycle with demand.
The T180 will continually monitor the room for occupancy.
Any occupancy detection, including door open, will set the
operation to occupied mode.
Operation from an Occupied Mode
In either mode, if the door is left open for more than 2 minutes
the T180 will disable the HVAC system. A one-time ten minutes
override can be initiated by pressing any thermostat keypad.
The T180 operates normally and looks for a door close. A door
close signal initiates occupancy status detection.
Optional detection equipment configurations and operation are
described below.
If occupancy is detected, the T180 will maintain normal HVAC
control. It then waits for a door open signal before determining
occupancy again.
If no occupancy signal is detected within 2 minutes, the
T180 changes to unoccupied mode and controls at setback
temperature values.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
15
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-399
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
opTIonal oCCupanCy deTeCTIon equIpmenT operaTIon
SB200-001 Occupancy Sensor
The SB200-001 occupancy sensor (Figure 11) serves as an
occupancy sensor for automatic control of a guest room HVAC
system. It incorporates an innovative dual delay processor
which allows the sensor to verify the nature of occupancies,
and is capable of eliminating unnecessary actuations of the
HVAC device due to unintentional passages or short time
occupancies. The sensor may also serve as a slave sensor
(Figure 12, page 15).
To enable door/window switch only operation, install a jumper to
JP3 (see Installing, Mounting and Wiring the Thermostat‚ page
4) and the occupancy input must be shorted to circuit common.
Figure 11: Optional Equipment Configuration #1
The sensor switch is open in occupied mode and closed in
unoccupied mode. An optional door and/or window switch
(Figure 11) is open when the door/window is open and is
closed when the door/window is closed.
NOTE: To use this configuration, a jumper must be installed
to JP3 to allow occupancy input.
An optional door and/or window switch (Figure 11)
can be added for use with the SB200-001 sensor.
Operation
In an occupied mode, the thermostat operates normally
and looks for a door open signal. When the door opens, the
thermostat waits for a door close signal. If the door is open for
more than two minutes, the thermostat turns the HVAC system
outputs to OFF. During this two minute period, if any button
is pressed on the keypad, the time delay is extended to ten
minutes. The time delay can only be extended once. Once the
HVAC outputs transition to OFF, a door closure is required to
re-enable the outputs. When the door closes, the thermostat
starts a two minute timer and tries to detect occupancy. If the
timer expires and no occupancy is detected, the thermostat
transitions to an unoccupied state. If occupancy is detected
while the timer is running, the thermostat will remain in the
occupied mode.
In an unoccupied mode, the thermostat sets heating and
cooling set points to setback values as determined by factory
or user settings. The fan is automatically set to cycle with
demand. The thermostat continually monitors the occupancy
sensor and will enter into occupied mode if occupancy is
detected.
If the installation is only using a door/window switch, the
thermostat will disable the HVAC outputs if this output is open
for longer than two minutes.
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
100
16
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
opTIonal oCCupanCy deTeCTIon equIpmenT operaTIon
SD200-001 Occupancy Sensor
SD200-002 Occupancy Sensor
The SD200-001 occupancy sensor (Figure 12) serves as a
master sensor for a guest room HVAC management system.
The sensor provides HVAC operation according to occupancy
status, as well as door/window switch monitoring, selectable
high/low temperature setback, form-C output, slave sensor
connectivity, and a five minute door open HVAC shut-off.
The SD200-002 occupancy sensor serves as a stand alone
master sensor for a guest room HVAC management system.
NOTE: To use this configuration, the jumper to JP3 is
removed to allow setback input.
An optional door and/or window switch (Figure 12)
and slave sensor can be added for use with the
SD200-001 sensor.
Operation
In an occupied mode, the SD200-001 occupancy sensor
(Figure 12) and door switch use advanced microprocessor
logic to determine occupancy. A door open signal will initiate
occupancy status detection. If the sensor determines that a
room is occupied, it will allow normal HVAC control. The sensor
will wait for another door open signal before determining
occupancy again.
The sensor provides HVAC operation according to occupancy
status, as well as selectable high/low temperature setback,
form-C output, and a five minute door open HVAC shut-off.
This system provides basic room setback and is ideal for
control of HVAC in commercial spaces.
NOTE: To use this configuration, the jumper to JP3 is
removed to allow setback input.
Operation
With each occupancy detection, an OFF delay is started and
can be set to delay for up to 30 minutes (Figure 13).
Figure 13: Optional Equipment Configuration #3
In an unoccupied mode, the sensor continually monitors
the room. Any occupancy detection will set the operation to
occupied mode.
Figure 12: Optional Equipment Configuration #2
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
17
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3101
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
annex I
annex I
Table 18: Custom Program Worksheet
Day
Time Period
Start Time
Heat Setpoint Temperature
Cool Setpoint Temperature
Wake
Day
Monday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Tuesday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Wednesday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Thursday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Friday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Saturday
Evening
Sleep
Wake
Day
Sunday
Evening
Sleep
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
102
18
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
annex II
annex II
Table 19: Service Menu Table
Menu
Feature
Range
Description/Comments
1
F° or C°
0-Celsius
1-Fahrenheit (Default)
Determines temperature displays in Fahrenheit or Celsius
3
Fan OFF Delay
0–99 Seconds (0-Default)
The amount of time (in seconds) the lowest available fan speed will run after the
thermostat outputs are disabled.
4
Range Low
50–90°F, 10–32°C (50°F- Default)
The lowest selectable temperature setpoint value.
5
Range High
50–90°F, 10–32°C (90°F- Default)
The highest selectable temperature setpoint value.
6
Setback Low
0-OFF 50–82°F, 11–27°C
(55°F- Default)
The temperature setpoint value you want the thermostat to Heat to when the
T180 is in the Setback mode.
7
Setback High
0-OFF 50–90°F, 11–32°C
(90°F- Default)
The temperature setpoint value you want the thermostat to Cool to when the
T180 is in the Setback mode.
8
Zone Temp Offset
+/- 9°F or +/- 4.5°C (0°F-Default)
Zone Temperature offset adjusts the sensed Zone Temperature displayed,
allowing calibration in the field.
9
Keypad Lockout
0-No keypad lockout (Default)
1-Disables System/Fan/Program
2-Disables all buttons
This function blocks access to certain features of the device. The Service Menu
is still available if the keypad lockout is enabled.
10
Fan Mode
1-ON
2-Auto
3-ON or Auto (Default)
ON-Fan is always on, regardless of demand. Auto-Fan is only ON with heating
or cooling demand. ON or Auto-User can choose either selection.
11
Fan Speeds
1-High
2-Low, High
3-Low, Med, High (Default)
Speeds which are selectable by the user.
12
System Mode
OFF, Auto OFF, Heat, Cool, Auto (Default)
Sets the system modes the occupant is able to select.
OFF, Heat, Cool Heat, Cool, Auto
13
Controlled OFF or OFF Override
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
When enabled, the unit will control to the Setback setpoints. This function will
also override the user mode setting of OFF if the room temperature is equal
to or above the Cool Setback setpoint or equal to or below the Heat Setback
setpoint.
14
Front Panel Setback Control
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
When enabled, Setback is shown as an available system mode selection. If
Setback mode is selected, the thermostat will control to the current Setback
Heat and Setback Cool setpoints.
15
Cycled Outside Air Damper
0-Cycles (Default)
1-Continuous
The Outside Air output will cycle with heat or cool demand if Cycles mode is
chosen. The Outside Air output is active anytime the thermostat is out of the
OFF mode when Continuous mode is chosen. When in Setback the Outside Air
output will turn OFF.
16
Temperature Based Purge Cycle
0-Time Based (Default)
1-Temperature Based
Determines if the Purge Cycle will be Temperature or Time Based.
17
Minimum Dead Band Adjustment
3°F (Default)
3–10°F, 1.5–5°C
A changeover deadband value prevents short cycling between Heating
and Cooling modes. The value is adjustable to meet various HVAC system
requirements.
18
Factory Default Reset
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
Toggles between OFF and DFLT. When factory default is desired, select DFLT.
25
Pre-Occupancy Purge
0 Hours (Default)
0–3 Hours
Energizes Fan Low for selected number of hours (0-3) prior to events Wake
(Occupied 1) and Day (Occupied 2)
30
Cycles Per Hour (CPH) Cooling
3 CPH (Default)
0–6 CPH
Defines the number of cycles per hour for cooling. A selection of 0 disables
cycling.
32
Cycles Per Hour (CPH) Heating
5 CPH (Default)
0–12 CPH
Defines the number of cycles per hour for heating. A selection of 0 disables
cycling.
35
Heat Recovery Rate
5°F/Hr (Default)
0–18°F/Hr 0–10°C/Hr
Defines the rate in which the device achieves the comfort setpoint. 0 disables
ramp recovery.
36
Cool Recovery Rate
5°F/Hr (Default)
0–18°F/Hr 0–10°C/Hr
Defines the rate in which the device achieves the comfort setpoint. 0 disables
ramp recovery.
40
Minimum OFF Time
4 Minutes (Default)
1–10 Minutes
Sets the minimum OFF time for both heat and cool output
45
Intermittent Fan
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
If enable is selected, the intermittent fan will operate during setback operation.
(Default values will be used unless menu 46 and 47 are adjusted.)
46
Intermittent Fan-ON Time
5 Minutes (Default)
1–60 Minutes
Defines the duration in which fan low will be ON. Fan ON will be activated after
Fan OFF time has passed.
47
Intermittent Fan-OFF Time
25 Minutes (Default)
0–60 Minutes
Defines the duration in which fan low will be OFF. Fan OFF will be activated
after Fan ON time has passed. A selection of 0 will result in continuous Fan.
71
Revision
—
Upon menu selection, the firmware and configuration revision will be displayed.
80
System Test Main Output (Cool)
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
If enable is selected, it will activate the main output (cool output) for 10 minutes.
Fan High will automatically turn ON. If a different menu is selected the output
will be disabled.
81
System Test Main Output (Heat)
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable
If enable is selected, it will activate the secondary output (heat output) for 10
minutes. Fan High will automatically turn ON. If a different menu is selected the
output will be disabled.
82
System Test Fan Output
0-Disable (Default)
1-Enable Fan Low Output
2-Enable Fan Medium Output
3-Enable Fan High Output
If enable is selected, it will activate the fan output for 10 minutes. If a different
menu or a different fan speed is selected the output will be disabled.
www.DaikinApplied.com
19
IM 1019 • MT 180 THERMOSTAT
IM IM 1152-3103
Addendum IM 1019 — MT180
Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
IM 1019 (10/11)
104
©2011 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1171-7
Group: WSHP/FCU
Part Number: 910166919
Date: April 2015
Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
Used with:
Water Source Heat Pumps (WSHP) - Sensor Part No . 910121754
SmartSource™ Units - Models GS & GT
Enfinity™ Units with MicroTech® III Controls - Models CCH, CCW;
VFC, VFW; LVC, LVW; MHC, MHW & VHC, VHF
Fan Coil Units (FCU) - Sensor Part No . 910113679, 910152148
Models With MicroTech III Controls - 910113575
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Front Panel Button Operation .....................7
Sensor buttons & dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Occupied icon indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Applications ...................................3
“OVERRIDE” on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Sensor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Mounting, Maintenance, Terminations .............. 4
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Initial Start-up, Display Descriptions ............... 6
Terminal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Initial start-up occupied sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Power fail start-up occupied sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Display descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Adjusting the setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Fan status & speed indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
System mode “HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF/DHUM” indicators . . .7
“ALARM” on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
“E-SAVE” word on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
“SETPOINT” word on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
“STATUS” word & dot on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Front panel button operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Optional Technician Adjustments..................9
Optional technician adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Diagnostics ................................... 11
Specifications .................................12
IM IM 1152-3105
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
Overview
The display sensor is used in conjunction with the MicroTech
III equipped units as described in the Application Section
below . The same sensor is used for Water Source Heat Pump
(WSHP) and for Fan Coil Units (FCU) with just a hardware
jumper and menu change during configuration. The sensor has
a digital display for Temperature, Humidity, Occupancy, Fan
Speed, System Mode, Alarm, Setpoint and Status indication .
Controls include six buttons for Setpoint, System Mode, Fan
Speed, Occupied/Unoccupied Request, and Override Reset .
(Figure 1) .
Sensor buttons & dimensions
Figure 1: Digital display sensor - Water Source Heat Pump P/N 910121754, Fan Coil P/N 910113679, 910113575, 910152148
2 .784
1 .125
4 .500
Fan Speed
Setpoint-Down
Setpoint-Up
Occupied/Unoccupied Request
Override Reset
System Mode
IM 1171-7
106
2
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
ApplicAtiOns
The display sensor can be used on the products shown in Table 1 .
Table 1: Product usage guide
Units
Product
Models
Horizontal
W .CCH, CCW
Vertical
Water Source
Heat Pumps
W .VFC, VFW
Enfinity™
Vertical Stacked
MicroTech III
Unit Controller
W .VHC
Console
Yes
W .MHC, MHW
Horizontal &
Vertical
SmartSource 1-Stage
W .GSH, GSV
SmartSource 2-Stage
W . GTH, GTV
Vertical
SmartSource Inverter
Horizontal
Fan Coils
Used with Digitally Adjustable Sensor
with Temperature and Humidity Display
Controls
ThinLine™
Vertical
MicroTech III SmartSource
Unit Controller
W .DFW
Daikin Inverter Controller
No
FC .H, FH .H
MicroTech III Unit Controller
Yes
FC .V, FH .V
The display sensor for water source heat pump applications is shown in Table 2 .
Table 2: Water source heat pump application guide
Applications
Cooling
Units
Product
Heating
Smart
Dehumidification
Hot Gas
Reheat
Simplified
Humidistat
Controlled
Dehumidification
Only
Boilerless
Supplemental
Primary
3-Way
Valve
Control
Horizontal
W.CCH,
W.CCW
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Vertical
W.VFC,
W.VFW
1
1
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes1
Yes1
No
No
W.VHC
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
W.MHC,
W.MHW
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
Yes1
Yes1
No
No
Vertical
Stacked
Note:
Enfinity
Console
Horizontal &
Vertical
SmartSource
1-Stage
W.GSH,
W.GSV
3
4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Horizontal &
Vertical
SmartSource
2-Stage
W.GTH,
W.GTV
3
4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Vertical
SmartSource
Inverter
W.DFW
NA
NA
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1With
optional Boilerless controls
Sensor functions
910152148, 910113575, 910113679, Fancoil unit model:
•
Display sensor to show room Temperature, fan speed
(AUTO/HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW), system mode (HEAT/COOL/
AUTO/OFF), ALARM, Override and occupancy .
Note:
Electric Heat
Models
Stages
Water
Source
Heat
Pumps
Dehumidification
Waterside
Economizer
910121754, Water source heat pump
model:
•
•
910113575 will not display a temperature value as this
is measured using a unit-mounted return air sensor.
www .DaikinApplied .com
3
Display sensor to show room Temperature, room humidity,
fan speed (AUTO/ON), system mode (HEAT/COOL/AUTO/
OFF/DHUM), ALARM, Override and occupancy .
De-humidification output contact has an adjustable
setpoint and configurable deadband. This output operates
automatically using the RH setpoint and deadband in the
system “AUTO” mode or in the “DHUM” mode .
IM 1171-7
IM IM 1152-3107
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
MOunting, MAintenAnce, terMinAtiOns
Mounting
Location
Avoid mounting on outside walls or in direct sunlight .
Junction Box, (J-Box)
1 . Pull the wire through the wall and out of the junction box,
leaving about six inches free .
2 . Pull the wire through the hole in the base plate .
3 . Secure the back plate to the box using the #6-32 × 1/2 inch
mounting screws provided .
4. Screw the plate firmly to the wall so the foam plate backing
is compressed about 50% .
5 . Terminate the unit according to the guidelines in the
Termination section .
6 . Attach Cover by latching it to the top of the base, rotating it
down and snapping into place .
7 . Secure the cover by backing out the lock-down screws
using a 1/16" Allen wrench until it is flush with the bottom of
the cover .
Figure 2: Junction box mounting (hardware is provided for
both junction box and drywall installation.)
Mounting
base plate
8 . Terminate the unit according to the guidelines in the
Termination section .
9 . Attach cover by latching it to the top of the base, rotating it
down and snapping it into place .
10 . Secure the cover by backing out the lock-down screws
using a 1/16" Allen wrench until it is flush with the sides of
the cover
Note: in any wall-mount application, the wall temperature
and the temperature of the air within the wall cavity can
cause erroneous readings.
The mixing of room air and air from within the wall
cavity can lead to condensation, erroneous readings
and sensor failure. To prevent these conditions, Daikin
recommends sealing the conduit leading to the junction
box with fiberglass.
Maintenance
Wipe the display as needed with a damp water only cotton
cloth . Do not use any type of cleaner as it may damage the
buttons or scratch the display . Do not paint .
Terminations
Daikin recommends using a twisted shielded pair of at least
22AWG for the power wire connections . The shield should be
earth grounded only at the power source . Larger gauge wire
may be required for long runs .
Figure 3: Sensor Circuit Board
Cover lockdown screws 1/16" allen
Drywall mounting
1 . Place the base plate against the wall where you want to
mount the sensor .
2 . Mark out the two mounting holes where the unit will be
attached to the wall . Drill a 3/16" hole in the center of each
mounting hole and insert a drywall anchor into the holes .
3 . Drill one 1/2" hole in the middle of the marked wiring
through hole area .
4 . Pull the wire through the wall and out the 1/2" hole, leaving
about six inches free .
5 . Pull the wire through the hole in the base plate .
6 . Secure the base to the drywall anchors using the #6 × 1"
mounting screws provided .
7. Screw the plate firmly to the wall so the foam plate backing
is compressed about 50% .
IM 1171-7
108
4
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
terMinAtiOns
All wiring must comply with the National Electric Code (NEC)
and local codes . Do NOT run any of this device’s wiring in the
same conduit as other AC power wiring. Tests show that fluctuating and inaccurate signal levels are possible when AC power
wiring is present in the same conduit as the signal lines . If you
are experiencing any of these difficulties, please contact your
Daikin representative .
CAUTION
Combination of power wiring (R, 5, DH) and analog (1, 2, 3, 4,
and 6 to ground) wiring in a common cable may cause signal
interference and must be avoided .
Figure 4: SmartSource MicroTech III board to digital room temperature sensor wiring
MicroTech III Board
SmartSource Board
I/O Expansion Module
Base Board
Terminal Block Label
TB2-1
TB1-1
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
TB1-5
TB3-1
TB3-2
TB1-1
Description
24VAC
Unit Status
Output
Fan & Unit
Mode
Setpoint Adjust
Room Temp
Sensor & Tenant
Override
DC Signal
Common
Emergency
Shutdown Input
Unoccupied
Input
Dehumidification
Input
Terminal Label
R
1
2
3
4
5
E
U
1
Typical Wiring
Description
24VAC
Unit Status Output
Fan & Unit Mode
Setpoint Adjust
5 (GND)
6 (FC)
DC Signal
Common
Sensor
4 (UTS)
E
U
DH
Dehumidification
3 (SP)
Unoccupied
2 (FM)
Emergency Shutdown
1 (ST)
Fan Speed Select
- Fan Coil Version
Only
R (24VAC)
Room Temp
Sensor & Tenant
Override
Terminal Label
Digitally Adjustable Room Temperature Sensor (Part No. 910121754)
Figure 5: Fan-Coil MicroTech III board to digital room temperature sensor wiring
MicroTech III Board
SmartSource Board
Base Board
Unoccupied
BO9
TB1-6
DC Signal
Common
24 VAC
TB1-1
Room Temp
Sensor & Tenant Override
Unit Status
Output
Terminal Label
TB1-2
Setpoint
Adjust
Description
TB1-3
Fan Mode
TB1-5
Unit Mode
TB2-2
24VAC
Terminal Block Label
TB1-4
TB2-1
AI7
AI4
AI3
AI1
COM
BI2
Typical Wiring
6 (FC)
Description
24VAC
Unit Status
Output
Fan & Unit Mode
Fan Speed
Select - Fan Coil
Version Only
Sensor
www .DaikinApplied .com
3 (SP)
4 (UTS)
5 (GND)
U
Unoccupied
2 (FM)
DC Signal
Common
1 (ST)
Room Temp
Sensor & Tenant
Override
R (24VAC)
Setpoint Adjust
Terminal Label
Digitally Adjustable Room Temperature Sensor (Part No. 910113679) / 910152148, 910113575
5
IM 1171-7
IM IM 1152-3109
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
initiAl stArt-up, DisplAy DescriptiOns
Terminal descriptions
Note:
Refer to "Figure 3: Sensor Circuit Board" on page 4
for terminal locations
R . . . . . . . . . . . 15 to 28VAC* (AC requires separate shielded wire)
(Shield terminated at power source only)
DH . . . . . . . . Dehumidification Contact (Triac from R to DH
@170mA, WSHP Only) .
U . . . . . . . . . . . Unoccupied Contact . (Terminal grounded when in
Unoccupied, VDC only) .
E . . . . . . . . . . . System “Off” Indication . (Terminal grounded when in
System “Off” mode, VDC only) .
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Indicator Input from the MicoTech III Unit Controller . (5VDC) .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Signal, and Fan Mode System (0 to 5VDC) .
Output Signal, System Mode Select for FCU only, (0
to 5VDC) .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Signal, Setpoint Adjust from 55º to 95˚F (default) or ±5º Configurable. (0 to 5VDC) See Setpoint
Analog Range Tolerances . See Table 3 .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Signal, Room Temp Thermistor Sensor . (10K
ATP Z curve, 10K-2) . 910113575 tenant override only
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground or Neutral* (AC requires separate shielded
wire) . Common Reference for All Signal Terminals .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Signal, Fan Speed Select for FCU only . (0 to
5VDC) . Terminal 6 not used for WSHP units .
Note: * The AC power wiring at terminals [R] & [5] should be
run in a separate twisted shielded pair to avoid possible
fluctuating and inaccurate signal levels induced into the
other sensor signal wires.
This sensor AC power can be run in the same conduit
with the sensor signal wire as long as it’s run in twisted,
shielded pair and terminated properly.
Power fail start-up occupied
sequence
On a power failure, the sensor retains its last known desired
occupancy status in non-volatile memory . On restoration of
power, the sensor restores its last known desired occupancy
state from memory. The occupied icon will reflect this with a
solid (occupied) or hollow (unoccupied) indication and terminal
“U” will have voltage applied (occupied) or grounded (unoccupied) . If the “STATUS/Dot” input on Terminal 1 from the
controller matches this occupancy state then the occupied
status icon will continue to be solid or hollow depending on the
last known state . If the “STATUS/Dot” input on Terminal 1 from
the controller is different from the sensor occupied state, then
the occupied icon will flash the desired occupancy state every
8 seconds indicating to the user a mismatch of the desired occupied status and system occupied status at the controller .
Display descriptions
Numerical display
The factory setting default numerical display (Figure 6) shows
current temperature (°F or °C) and toggles to humidity and
setpoint display every 5 seconds .
Figure 6: Sensor numerical display
Setpoint analog range tolerance
Table 3: Setpoint analog range tolerance
Adjusting the setpoint
Setpoint Analog Tolerance
55° to 95°F
Scale
-3° to +3°F
Scale
-5° to +5°F
Scale
Terminal 3 Analog
Output
@ 55°F (min .)
@-3°F (min .)
@ -5°F (min .)
0 .0 to 0 .10 vdc
@65°F
@-1 .5°F
@-2 .5°F
1 .3 to 1 .42 vdc
@75°F
@0°F
@0°F
2 .12 to 2 .2 vdc
@85°F
@+1 .5°F
@+2 .5°F
2 .58 to 2 .63 vdc
@95°F (max .)
@+3°F (max .)
@+5°F (max .)
3 .0 to 4 .0 vdc
Initial start-up occupied sequence
On initial installation power-up, the sensor is in “Occupied”
mode with a solid occupied icon and DC voltage at terminal
“U” . If the “STATUS/Dot” input on Terminal 1 from the controller
indicates occupied (“ON” continuous), then the unit continues
to stay “Occupied” . If the “STATUS/Dot” input on Terminal 1
from the controller indicates unoccupied (5 seconds “ON” then
5.5 seconds “OFF”), then the occupied icon will flash the desired occupancy state every 8 seconds, indicating to the user a
mismatch of the desired occupied status and system occupied
status at the controller
IM 1171-7
110
(Temperature or humidity)
Whichever is displayed at the time, temperature or humidity:
• Push the
or
button, the displayed setpoint can be
adjusted up or down .
• After an adjustment, the setpoint is displayed for 5 seconds.
During the setpoint display push
(System Mode Button)
to switch between the temperature display or the humidity
display .
• Push the
or
button, the displayed setpoint can be
adjusted up or down . (See "Front Panel Button Operation"
on page 7 for details .)
The unit can also be programmed in the field to “Setpoint Only”
display or Setpoint Lockout . See the "Optional Technician
Adjustments" on page 9 .
6
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
FrOnt pAnel ButtOn OperAtiOn
Occupied icon indicator
The Occupied Icon on the left side of the display indicates
whether the room sensor is in the Occupied or Unoccupied
Mode, (Figure 7) .
Figure 7: Occupied & unoccupied icons
= “Occupied”
= “Unoccupied”
Solid is Occupied and Hollow is Unoccupied .
• A blinking icon every 8 seconds indicates an override
request that has not been fulfilled.
“STATUS” word & dot on the
display
The Status “Dot” on the display indicates the unit status
or alarm condition . It is turned “On” and “Off” by interpreting the
status input from the controller on terminal 1 .
Table 4 shows the alternating conditions and sensor status .
Table 4: WSHP unit status input timing definition
“OVERRIDE” on the display
The “OVERRIDE” word indicator in the top left corner illuminates when the sensor is signalled by the “Status” input
(Terminal 1) .
This is initiated from the Override/Reset Button at first and
then confirmed from the “Status” input code which keeps the
“OVERRIDE” indicator on .
Fan status & speed indicators
“Fan & No Wavy Lines” indicate the fan is Off .
System mode “HEAT/COOL/AUTO/
OFF/DHUM” indicators
The “HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF/DHUM” Mode Indicators on
the bottom of the display describe each of the sensor’s modes .
The mode is changed by pushing the System Mode button on
the sensor . (Dhum is only used on WSHP units .)
“ALARM” on the display
“E-SAVE” word on the display
The “E-SAVE” word indicator on top illuminates when the
sensor interprets the “Status” input code from the controller as
Standby Mode (See Table 4 on page 7) .
“SETPOINT” word on the display
The “Setpoint” word on top illuminates when the sensor is
displaying the setpoint on the numerical display (Temperature
or Humidity) . When this “Setpoint” indicator is off, the numerical
display shows the actual room temperature or humidity .
www .DaikinApplied .com
WSHP
Availability
Display
Indication
0 .5 seconds
0 .5 seconds
Controller Off (or
Network
“Wink” operation
active)
“ALARM” On
0 .0 seconds
Continuous
Unit running in
Night
Setback Override
Mode or
no power to the
unit
“OVERRIDE” On
0 .5 seconds
5 .5 seconds
Unoccupied
Mode
Hollow Occupied
Icon
5 .5 seconds
0 .5 seconds
Standby Mode
“E-SAVE” On
Occupied Mode
Solid Occupied
Icon
0 .0 seconds
Table 5: Fan Coil (FCU) unit status input timing definition
“Fan & 4 Wavy Lines” indicate High, and the word
“AUTO” indicate fan Auto mode .
The “ALARM” word indicator on top illuminates when the sensor interprets the “Status” input code from the controller as an
alarm . See Table 4 on page 7 .
Status Dot
"OFF" (0 vdc)
Time
Continuous
“Fan & 2 Wavy Lines” indicate Low .
“Fan & 3 Wavy Lines” indicate Medium .
Status Dot "ON"
(+ 5 vdc) time
Status Dot "ON"
(+ 5 vdc) time
Status Dot
"OFF" (0 vdc)
Time
0 .3 seconds
Fan Coil
Availability
Display
Indication
0 .3 seconds
Alarm Active
“ALARM” On
0 .0 seconds
Continuous
Unit running in
Night
Setback Override
Mode or
no power to the
unit
“OVERRIDE” On
0 .5 seconds
5 .5 seconds
Unoccupied
Mode
Hollow Occupied
Icon
5 .5 seconds
0 .5 seconds
Standby Mode
“E-SAVE” On
Continuous
0 .0 seconds
Occupied Mode
Solid Occupied
Icon
3 .0 seconds
3 .0 seconds
Calibration Mode/
Network Wink
No Change
Front panel button operation
System mode indication (FCU only)
“HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF”
The “HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF” Mode Indicators on the bottom
of the display show the mode status of the sensor and are
changed by pushing the System Mode button .
• “HEAT” on the display means the unit will only provide
heating .
• “COOL” on the display means the unit will only provide
cooling .
• “AUTO” on the display means the unit switches
automatically to provide cooling or heating .
• “Off” on the display means the unit will not provide cooling,
heating or fan operation .
7
IM 1171-7
IM IM 1152-3111
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
FrOnt pAnel ButtOn OperAtiOn
There should always be one indicator “ON” unless the sensor
has no power or has a problem . The System Mode Analog Output voltage on Term . 2 will change based on the system mode .
“Fan & 4 Wavy Lines & AUTO” - the fan runs on a
call for HEAT/COOL/DHUM . Otherwise the fan is off .
“Fan & 4 Wavy Lines” - the fan runs continuously
regardless of the system mode setting of HEAT/
COOL/AUTO/DHUM .
“Fan & No Wavy Lines” - the fan is Off when the
system mode is “Off” .
Fan speed indication (FCU only)
“AUTO/HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW”
The Fan Speed Indicators on the display show the fan speed
status (AUTO/HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW) and are changed by pushing the Fan Mode button .
“Fan & 4 Wavy Lines & AUTO” - the fan stages up
or down automatically depending on the demand for
HEAT/COOL .
“Fan & 4 Wavy Lines” - the fan runs continuously at
high speed regardless of the system mode setting of
HEAT/COOL/AUTO .
“Fan & 3 Wavy Lines” - the fan runs continuously
at medium speed regardless of the system mode
setting of HEAT/COOL/AUTO .
“Fan & 2 Wavy Lines” - the fan runs continuously at
low speed regardless of the system mode setting of
HEAT/COOL/AUTO .
“Fan & No Wavy Lines” - Indicates the fan is Off .
There should always be one indicator “On” unless the sensor
has no power or has a problem . The Fan Speed Analog Output
voltage on Terminal 6 will change based on the fan speed
selection .
System mode indication (WSHP only)
“HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF/DHUM”
The “HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF/DHUM” Mode Indicators on the
display show the mode status of the sensor and are changed
by pushing the System Mode button .
• “HEAT” on the display means the unit will only provide
heating .
• “COOL” on the display means unit will only provide cooling .
• “AUTO” on the display means the unit can switch
automatically to provide cooling or heating or
dehumidification.
• “OFF” on the display means the unit will not provide
cooling, heating, dehumidification or fan operation (“E”
terminal goes Low) .
• “DHUM” on the display means that only dehumidification
will operate .
There should always be one indicator “On” unless the sensor
has no power or has a problem . The System Mode Analog
Output voltage on Terminal 2 will change based on the system
mode selection .
Fan indication (WSHP only)
“AUTO/ON”
The Fan Indicators on the left side of the display show the fan
status (AUTO/ON) of the sensor and are changed by pushing
the Fan Mode button .
IM 1171-7
112
Override/Reset button (timed
override & alarm reset)
When the “Override/Reset” Button is pressed, the thermistor
sensor is shorted . If held for more than 3 seconds but less than
11 seconds, it puts the controller into a timed Occupied Override (the time is set by the controller) . If the unit is in alarm,
then holding the “Override/Reset” Button for more than 11 seconds will clear all alarms in the controller but only if the cause of
the alarm has already returned to its non-alarm condition . Some
alarms will not reset from the digital room sensor .
In this case, power to the unit must be cycled off for 5 seconds
to clear the alarm . Continuously resetting alarms from the
room sensor could damage the controller . Please call a service
technician when repeated alarm resets are required to keep
the unit operational .
Occupied button (occupied/
unoccupied request)
Note: Terminal “U” opens HI to source power on power-up
“Occcupied”
When the “Occupancy” Button is pushed, the current “Occupied” or “Unoccupied” status of the sensor will be toggled to
the opposite condition for 20 seconds . Both the display and “U”
terminal output reflect the new status during the 20 seconds.
If a confirmation signal is received from the controller into
the Status Input terminal “1” within 20 seconds, then the new
occupancy condition remains; otherwise the “U” terminal will
return to the original state and the “Occupied” Icon will flash the
desired occupancy state every 8 seconds .
(
Up & down setpoint buttons
temp or humidity)
Press the Setpoint “Up/Down” Buttons once to enter the Setpoint Adjustment Mode . View the display to see whether the
unit is in Temperature or Humidity Setpoint mode . If needed,
press the “System Mode” Button once to toggle to the desired
Setpoint . The current setpoint value will display for 5 seconds .
When the “Up/Down” Buttons are pressed in this mode, the
temperature or humidity setpoint will change in one degree or
percent (%) increments . It will only change within the temperature setpoint range that was ordered (or the setpoint range that
was set via the Program Mode) .
The humidity setpoint is always between 40% to 90% . After 5
seconds of no buttons being pushed, the sensor will go into the
standard display mode .
8
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
OptiOnAl techniciAn ADjustMents
System mode button (FCU has
HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF) or (WSHP
has HEAT/COOL/AUTO/OFF/DHUM)
When the “System” Button is pushed, the unit switches between system modes .
Fan mode button (FCU has AUTO/
HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW/OFF) (WSHP
has AUTO/ON)
When the “Fan” Button is pushed, the fan speed changes in
order from one speed to another .
Optional technician adjustments
Note: The sensor setup is factory set per your order. Setup
adjustments are not required
The unit is shipped ready to install per the order and does
not require any special setup or programming . The following
Program Menu Changes are available if the installer decides
to change the factory settings . The Setpoint Up/Down Buttons
and Occupancy Button are used in the Programming Mode to
make Menu changes and selection .
Set-up jumper (J50) configuration
(Factory set per order)
CAUTION
Program mode menu pages:
(Display required)
Note: Both J50 “F/C” and J50 “MDL” jumpers must be
configured first before entering the program “PRG” mode.
Entering program mode and making
changes
1 . Install the J50 “PRG” jumper onto both pins with power
turned on to enter Program Mode .
2 . Press the Up/Down Buttons to advance to the desired
program parameter from P1 through P14 (Parameters
described below) .
3. Press the Occupancy Button to select the specific program
parameter to change .
4 . Change the parameter value as described in the Mode
Menus section below . (Usually with the Up/Down Button)
5 . Press the Occupancy Button again to set the selected
parameter .
6 . Press the Up/Down Buttons to proceed to the next
parameter (as in Step 2 above) .
7 . When done making changes, remove the J50 “PRG”
jumper (and place over one pin) . This action will end the
Programming Mode and store all the values . The sensor is
now in the Run Mode .
Program mode menu pages
P1
Turn off power to the unit before reconfiguring the F/C or MDL
jumper settings .Damage to the sensor board can occur if jumpers are moved while there is power to the unit and sensor .
•
Figure 8: J50 Jumper
•
•
Label description setting
PRG
Program Mode
or Run Mode
Menu below) .
F/C
ºC Indication
or ºF Indication
MDL
Sets the Model
FCU or WSHP
www .DaikinApplied .com
Program Mode = Jumper installed
for Program Mode (See Program
Run Mode = Jumper removed for
Run Mode (Place jumper on one
pin only) .
ºC = Jumper installed for ºC .
ºF = Jumper removed for ºF
Indication (Place jumper on one
pin only) . 910152148, 910113575
910113679 = Jumper removed for
FCU (Default for units ordered
as FCU) .
910121754 = Jumper installed for
WSHP (Default for units ordered
as WSHP) .
P2
P3
P4
9
Setpoint Mode (Factory set to temperature value “S1” .
J50 ºF/ºC must be set before entering the program
“PRG” mode) .
S1 – “UP/DOWN” to select setpoint to absolute
temperature setpoint value . Actual setpoint value set in
P4 and P5 . Example: 55ºF (13º C) to 95ºF (35º C) .
S2 – “UP/DOWN” to select setpoint to relative
temperature setpoint value of ±5 .0ºF (±2 .8ºC) .
S3 – “UP/DOWN” to select setpoint to relative
temperature setpoint value of ±3 .0ºF (±1 .67ºC) for
Enfinity systems.
Temperature Offset (Factory set to zero) .
• “UP” to increase offset up to +2.
• “DOWN” to decrease offset down to -2.
Humidity Offset (Factory set to zero) .
• “UP” to increase offset up to +5
• “DOWN” to decrease offset down to -5.
Setpoint Low Range (Factory set to 55°F or 13°C
depending on J50 °F/°C setting) .
P1 in S1 Mode: Adjustment range 55 to 65°F or 13 to
18°C .
• “UP” to increase the low setpoint range up to 65°F
or 18°C .
• “DOWN” to decrease the low setpoint range down
to 55°F or 13°C .
IM 1171-7
IM IM 1152-3113
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
OptiOnAl techniciAn ADjustMents
P1 in S2 Mode: No adjustment . Factory set to -5°F
(-2 .8°C) .
P1 in S3 Mode: No adjustment . Factory set to -3°F
(-1.6°C) for Enfinity systems.
P5
Setpoint High Range (Factory set to 95°F or 35°C
depending on J50-°F/°C setting) .
P1 in S1 Mode: Adjustment range 85 to 95°F or 29 to
35°C .
• “UP” to increase the high setpoint range up to 95°F
or 35°C .
• “DOWN” to decrease the high setpoint range down
to 85°F or 29°C .
P1 in S2 Mode: No adjustment . Factory set to 5°F
(2 .8°C) .
P1 in S3 Mode: No adjustment . Factory set to 3°F
(1.6°C) for Enfinity systems.
P6
Fan Lock Mode (Factory set to Unlocked “Unl”)
• “UP/DOWN” to set Fan Lock mode. Choose from
list below:
All Models
Unl
Enables fan to be controlled by the
Sensor Fan button
All Models
FA
Locks fan to the Fan Auto position
(No Sensor Fan button control)
WSHP Models FO
Locks fan to the Fan On position
(No Sensor Fan button control)
FCU Models
FH
Locks fan to the Fan High speed
position (No Sensor Fan button control)
FCU Models
Fd
Locks fan to the Fan Medium speed
position (No Sensor Fan button control)
FCU Models
FL
Locks fan to the Fan Low speed
position (No Sensor Fan button control)
FCU Models
Fo
Locks fan to the Fan Off position
(No Sensor Fan button control)
P7
System Lock Mode (Factory set to Unlocked “Unl”)
• “UP/DOWN” to set System Lock mode. Choose
from list below:
Unl
Enables System to be controlled by the Sensor
System Mode button .
UH
Locks System to the Heat mode (No Sensor
System button control) .
UC
Locks System to the Cool mode (No Sensor
System button control) .
UA
Locks System to the Auto mode (No Sensor System button control) .
UO
Locks System to the Off mode (No Sensor System button control) .
Ud
Locks System to the Dhum mode (No Sensor
System button control) .
P8
Display Resolution (Factory set to ±0 .5 resolution, “0 .5”) .
0.1 “UP/DOWN” to set resolution to ±0 .1, (Rounds up
at .05) .
0.5 “UP/DOWN” to set resolution to ±0 .5, (Rounds up
at .08) .
1 “UP/DOWN” to set resolution to ±1 .0, (Rounds up at .5) .
IM 1171-7
114
P9
Dehumidification Dead band (DB) (Factory set to
2%), (WSHP Only) .
2 “UP/DOWN” to set Dead band at 2% (On at setpoint
SP, Off at SP-DB) .
3 “UP/DOWN” to set Dead band at 3% (On at setpoint
SP, Off at SP-DB) .
4 “UP/DOWN” to set Dead band at 4% (On at setpoint
SP, Off at SP-DB) .
5 “UP/DOWN” to set Dead band at 5% (On at setpoint
SP, Off at SP-DB) .
P10 Display Mode (Factory set to #16 for WSHP units,
factory set to #4 or #3 for FCU Units) .
• “UP/DOWN” to set display mode.
• Choose from numbered list below. Choices 5-16 will
not be shown if P12 = nOH .
1 = No value on the main display (Blank) .
2 = Temperature Value (TV) .
3 = Temperature Setpoint (TSP) (FCU Default 910113575) .
4 = Temperature Value & Temperature Setpoint (FCU
Default 910152148, 910113679) .
5 = Humidity Value (HV) .
6 = Temperature Value & Humidity Value .
7 = Humidity Value & Temperature Setpoint .
8 = Temperature Value, Temp Setpoint & Humidity
Value .
9 = Humidity Setpoint (HSP) .
10 = Temperature Value & Humidity Setpoint .
11 = Temperature Setpoint & Humidity Setpoint .
12 = Temperature Value & Temp Setpoint & Humidity
Setpoint .
13 = Humidity Value & Humidity Setpoint .
14 = Temperature Value, & Humidity Value & Humidity
Setpoint .
15 = Humidity Value & Temperature Setpoint & Humidity
Setpoint .
16 = Temperature Value & Temperature Setpoint &
Humidity Value & Humidity Setpoint (WSHP Default) .
P11 Setpoint Button Lockout (Factory set to “0”: Temp . &
Humidity Setpoint Enabled .
Note: 1. Selections in P11 will impact Menu P10).
2. After changing P11 option, remove PRG jumper on
J50 to exit programming mode and refresh options.
In order to make additional programming changes,
PRG Jumper must be reinstalled to enter
programming mode.
0
Both Temperature & Humidity Setpoints are enabled
(No Setpoint lockout, WSHP Units Only) .
1
Humidity Setpoint Only is Enabled (Temperature
setpoint is locked out, WSHP Units Only) .
2
Temperature Setpoint Only is Enabled (Humidity
setpoint is locked out) .
3
Both Temperature & Humidity Setpoints are Disabled
(Full Setpoint lockout) .
10
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
OptiOnAl techniciAn ADjustMents
P12
Dehumidification Enable/Disable
nOH Dehumidification is Disabled (Factory default
for FCU Units) .
HuA Dehumidification is Enabled (Factory default
for WSHP Units) .
P13 Occupancy Button Enable/Disable (Factory set to
enabled “ObE”) .
ObE Occupancy Button Enabled (Factory default)
Obd Occupancy Button Disabled
P14 Firmware Version - XXX.X
P15 For Units with a BACnet or lOnwOrks
Communications Module
Setpoint Calibration Offset (Factory set to “0” .)
• “UP” to increase offset up to +100 will raise the MicroTech
III perceived set point from the sensor .
• “DOWN” to decrease offset down to -100. This will lower
the MicroTech III perceived set point from the sensor .
Calibrate the displayed set point to the set point value sent
to the MicroTech III as follows:
1 . Set the digital room sensor displayed set point to 90° F .
2 . Observe the local set point via the BAS/EMS connected
by the BACnet or LonWorks Communications Module .
3 . Adjust the Configuration Menu P15 on the sensor until the
local set point and the displayed set point are equal .
P15 For Units without a BACnet or lOnwOrks
Communications Module
Setpoint Calibration Offset (Factory set to “0” .)
• “UP” to increase offset up to +100 will raise the MicroTech
III perceived set point from the sensor .
• “DOWN” to decrease offset down to -100. This will lower
the MicroTech III perceived set point from the sensor .
The Setpoint Calibration Offset can be calculated using the
following formula:
ROUND [(Controller Vdd / Sensor Vdd )*1000]-1000
Example:
Given: Controller Vdd = 5 .15VDC
Sensor Vdd = 4 .95 VDC
The programmed Calibration Offset would be
[(5 .15/4 .95)*1000] -1000 = 40
Diagnostics
Override/Reset not working
•
Measure the resistance to ground at the sensor output
terminal (Term . 4) . When pushing the Override Button, it
should show a short . If not, replace the sensor .
No fan voltage signal
•
•
Be sure the termination and wiring is correct and the
controller is set up properly .
Replace unit if all checks are okay.
No system voltage signal
•
•
Be sure the termination and wiring is correct and the
controller is set up properly .
Replace unit if all checks are okay.
De-humidification not working
•
•
•
Adjust the System Mode to DHUM and check terminal DH
for voltage .
Change the RH setpoint above and below the ambient RH
to prove the output contact .
Replace unit if it still doesn’t work.
Occupied not working
•
•
Verify that this terminal is in a powered circuit. Measure
the voltage to ground at the occupied terminal (U) . When
pushing the Occupied Button (<2 secs), it should read close
to 0 volts . When you lift the button it should read high volts .
Replace unit if it still doesn’t work.
“Err” shown on the screen
•
This indicates that the temperature and humidity sensing
element has failed .
FAN key does not change fan mode
•
Check to verify FAN is not locked out in Programming Mode
Menu Page P6 .
MODE key does not change system mode
•
Check to verify Mode is not locked out in Programming
Mode Menu Page P7 .
Up or Down key does not change setpoints
•
Check to verify Set points are not locked out in
Programming Mode Menu Page P11 .
Solid Man goes away after 20 seconds
•
Problem & possible solution
Occupancy Request was not acknowledged by Main
controller, check wiring of Status Signal from controller .
No display
•
•
Check the power connections and power voltage level
Replace unit if power is okay.
No temperature signal
•
•
Be sure the termination and wiring is correct and the
controller is set up properly . Make sure the “Override/
Reset” button is not stuck down .
Replace unit if all checks are okay.
www .DaikinApplied .com
11
IM 1171-7
IM IM 1152-3115
Addendum IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor
speciFicAtiOns
Supply voltage
AC Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (R) 7 to 28VAC, 24VAC nominal, 0 .17VA
GND/Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . .(5) Sensor common reference ground .
Sensor
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . .10K-2 Thermistor, ±0 .36ºF (±0 .2ºC)
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2% Accuracy from 20 to 80%,
Capacitive .
Outputs
Unoccupied . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(U), Unoccupied = Digital low to ground
(Same ground as power source),
100mA @5VDC max .
Dehumidify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(DH), = Dehumidify = Voltage output
(same as supply voltage), 170mA max .
System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(E), System Off = Digital low to ground
(Same ground as power source),
100mA @5VDC max .
Fan Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2 or 6), Analog, 0 to 5 VDC .
System Mode . . . . . . . . . . .(2), Analog, 0 to 5 VDC .
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(3), Analog, 0 to 5 VDC .
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . .(4), Analog thermistor resistance .
Sensor controls
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Up/Down buttons
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 button to cycle between Heat/Cool
Auto/Off/Dhum/Off
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 button to cycle between Auto/High/
On .
Occupied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 button to check and request change
in Occupancy Status .
Override/Reset . . . . . . .1 button to request timed occupancy
override and reset alarms .
Inputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(1), Controller alarm & system status,
5VDC max .
Termination: . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Terminals, 16 to 22 AWG .
Mounting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard 2" × 4" J-Box or Drywall
Field setup jumper J50
PRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Mode, On = Program, Off =
Run .
F/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Display Units, On = ºC, Off = ºF .
MDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MODEL, On = WSHP . Off = FCU .
IM 1171-7
116
Display
LCD
Overall size . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 .04"W × 1 .33"H .
Main Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±999 .9 Digits @0 .6"H
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 .5 displayed value, 0 .1 for offset adjust
Main Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Temp, Humidity & Setpoint, toggling
every 5 sec .
Eng . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ºF, ºC, %RH .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Heat/Cool/Auto/Off/Dhum .
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Auto/High/Medium/Low .
Occupied Icon . . . . . . . . . . Hollow = Unoccupied, Solid = Occupied .
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Override, Alarm, E-Save, Setpoint
Field configuration menu
(Requires J50 PRG jumper to be “On”)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Temp or Humidity display, ±2ºF (±1 .0ºC)
and ±5% RH .
Setpoint range . . . . . . . . .Default 55º to 95ºF (13º to 35ºC), ±3ºF
(±1 .6ºC) or ±5ºF (±3ºC) . Adjustable
between 55º to 95ºF, ±3ºF (±1 .6ºC) or
±5 .0ºF (±2 .8ºC) .
Fan Lock-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Any fan speed or off can be locked in
System Lock-in . Any system mode can
be locked in
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Main display can be default .5, or .1 or
1 .0 (ºF, ºC or %) .
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . .Temp only, RH only, Setpoint only or
any combination .
Dhum DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dehumidify Dead Band adjust, 2%
default .
Enclosure material
ABS Plastic, UL94V-0 .
Ambient
32º to 122ºF (0º to 50ºC), 0 to 95%RH, Non-condensing .
Agency
Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
(RoHS) .
©2015 Daikin Applied (04/15) | (800) 432–1342 | www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 831 — Thermostat Conversion Kit
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 831
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 667757200
Date: October 2013
Fan Coil Thermostat Conversion Kit
to Eliminate 3-speed Switch Capability
Safety Information
The installation of this equipment shall be in accordance
the regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and all
applicable codes. It is the responsibility of the installer to
determine and follow the applicable codes. This equipment
is to be installed only by an experienced installation
company which employs trained personnel.
WARNING
Rigorously adhere to field wiring procedures regarding
proper lockout and tagout of components.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, personal injury or death:
1. Installer must be qualified, experienced technician.
2. Disconnect power supply before installation to
prevent electrical shock and damage to equipment.
Introduction
CAUTION
If the FAN Switch remains in the left-most (Off) position
the thermostat will NOT function properly.
1. Carry out this procedure before mounting the
thermostat or applying power to it. If the thermostat
is already mounted, turn off all power to it before
proceeding.
2. Slide the FAN switch on the front of the thermostat to
the setting at which you want the motor to run all the
time.
3. Remove the cover from the thermostat by gently
prying with behind the left hand edge of the cover
with a small screwdriver, then pulling it off as shown
in Figures 1 and 2.
NOTE: Once you exchange thermostat covers, the user
can no longer change this setting.
4. Adjust the dip switch and jumpers to your desired
configuration (see thermostat installation manual).
5. Pull off the fan slide switch cap (Figure 3). Note: Be
careful not to change the position of the switch you
set in Step 2.
6. Place the new thermostat cover that does not have the
3-speed switch opening on the thermostat (Figure 4).
IM 831 Thermostat Conversion Kit
This thermostat conversion kit number 107345245 converts
a fan coil unit thermostat to a thermostat without a 3-speed
switch. The thermostat kit includes a cover that does
NOT have an opening for the 3-speed control switch. The
following is the proper procedure to convert the thermostat.
Procedure
IM IM 1152-3117
Addendum IM 831 — Thermostat Conversion Kit
Figure 1: Opening the Thermostat Cover
Figure 3: Remove Plastic Fan Slide Switch Cap
Pry behind left hand
edge of cover to remove
Figure 2: Accessing The Components
Figure 4: New Thermostat Cover
Pull left end of cover
away until tabs at
right end are cleared
Without 3-Speed
Switch Opening
IM 831 (10/13)
118
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum IM 763 — Automatic Changeover Switch
Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 763
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: 106333101
Date: October 2013
Automatic Changeover Switch
for Automatic Seasonal Changeover on Two-pipe Systems
WARNING
Installation and maintenance are to be performed only by
qualified personnel who are familiar with and in compliance
with state, local and national codes and regulations, and
experienced with this type of equipment.
Figure 1: Automatic Changeover Switch
(Kit P/N 039398600)
CAUTION
Sharp edges and coil surfaces are a potential injury
hazards. Avoid contact with them
These line voltage changeover switches are designed to
switch a thermostat from heating to cooling based on a
change in supply water temperature. The switches can be
mounted on 5/8" or 7/8" O.D. copper tube or iron pipe.
Both models are easily mounted to the supply piping with a
simple spring clip included with the thermostat.
Models
The 039398600 model (Fig. 1) has 110 in. leads and is the
standard changeover switch. The 06361801 model (Fig. 2)
has the same operating characteristics and includes 18 in.
conduit and connector.
Both models are snap acting, SPDT switches.
Terminal No. 1 has a black wire and is the common (C)
connected to valve (valve cycle) or to the yellow wire of the
speed switch (fan cycle).
Terminal No. 2 has a red wire and is normally open (N.O.).
Connected to the heating (red) wire of the thermostat.
IM 763 Discharge Conversion Kit
Terminal No. 3 has a blue wire and is normally closed
(N.C.). Connected to the cooling (blue) wire of the
thermostat.
At approximately 65°F, plus or minus 6°F, terminals 1 and
3 are closed and terminals 1 and 2 are open. At 95°F, plus
or minus 6°F, terminals 1 and 2 are closed and terminals 1
and 3 are open.
IM IM 1152-3119
Addendum IM 763 — Automatic Changeover Switch
Specifications
Table 26: Electrical Rating
Model
039398600
061361801
Voltage
FLA
LRA
Restive
24 – 240
15 – 5
90 – 30
25
Changeover Range:
65°F to 95°F (18°C to 35°C)
Maximum Operating
Temperature Limits
220°F Fluid Temperature @ 125°F Ambient
(104°C Fluid Temperature @ 52°C Ambient)
Agency Approval
UL Listed, CSA Approved
Figure 2: Automatic Changeover Switch
(Kit P/N 061361801)
The specifications above are nominal and conform to generally acceptable
industry standards. Daikin is not responsible for damages resulting from
misapplication or misuse of its products.
IM 763 (10/13)
120
©2013 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
Operation and Maintenance Manual
OM 1111-2
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: OM 1111
Date: October 2015
MicroTech® Unit Controller with
I/O Expansion Module for Fan Coils
OM 1111-2 MicroTech Controller
Models FCHH / FCHC / FCHR and
Cabinet Unit Heaters, Models FHHH / FHHC / FHHR
IM IM 1152-3121
Addendum OM 1111
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Miscellaneous Control Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
General Use and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MicroTech Baseboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Replacing a MicroTech Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MicroTech Unit Controller with an optional
LonWorks® Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
I/O Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Control Boards Terminals and Connectors
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fan Coil/Cabinet Unit Heater Unit Control . . . . . . . . 13
Fan Coil/Cabinet Unit Heater Control
Output Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Appendix C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MicroTech Unit Controller with an optional
BACnet Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Appendix D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Typical Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
122
2
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
IntroductIon
This Operation Manual covers the MicroTech® Unit Controller
for the Daikin ThinLine Fan Coils . For information on
LonWorks® or BACnet® communication modules and other
ancillary components, see:
General Use and Information
IntroductIon
The MicroTech unit controller is a fan coil/cabinet unit heater
control platform used to control the fan coil/unit heater in all
modes of operation, including economizers, control valves, and
all components used to control conditioned space temperature .
By adding a communication module, (LonWorks or BACnet)
network integration is possible . The controller can be used with
wall sensor control only .
• IM 1012 — MicroTech III Fan Coil LonWorks
Communication Module .
• IM 1013 — MicroTech III Fan Coil Unit Controller BACnet
MS/TP Communication Module .
• IM 933 — LonWorks Plug-In Software for use with
MicroTech III Unit Controller - LonWorks Communication
Module .
• IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor Installation
and Maintenance Manual
No outside power sources may be used to operate MicroTech
controller . All units must be properly grounded per local code
requirements . See the Installation Manual IM 1152 for specific
power requirements .
• OM 1095 — MicroTech III The Downloading And
Configuration Procedure
• ED 15135 — MicroTech III Fan Coil Unit Controller
Protocol Information
For information on ThinLine Fan Coils and Cabinet Unit
Heaters see
• Catalog 724 — ThinLine Horizontal Fan Coils (Type
FCHC, FCHH, and FCHR)
• Catalog 725 — ThinLine Horizontal Cabinet Unit Heaters
(Type FHHC, FHHH, and FHHR)
• IM 1152 — Installation Manual Daikin ThinLine Horizontal
Fan Coils and Cabinet Unit Heaters (Type FC and FH
Horizontal Design) .
www .DaikinApplied .com
3
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3123
Addendum OM 1111
IntroductIon
Control Inputs
The baseboard accepts the following analog and binary control
inputs:
1 . Room Temp and Tenant Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
2 . Local Setpoint Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
3 . Fan Mode/Speed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
4 . Entering Water Temperature (EWT) . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
5 . Discharge Air Temperature (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
6 . Heat/Cool/Auto Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog
7 . Freeze Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binary
8 . Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binary
Fan Mode/Speed Switch
Analog input may be used to determine the position of the fan
mode and speed switch. Input DC voltages are defined as
follows: 0 .0v = Auto, 1 .0v = High, 2 .0v = Medium, 3 .0v = Low,
4 .0v = Off, 5 .0v = Switch is not present .
Entering Water Temperature (EWT)
Analog input may be used to measure temperature of water
entering the hydronic coil using a 10k NTC thermistor . The
sensor is only required in 2-Pipe Cooling/Heating systems or
Heating-only with Supplemental Electric Heat, and is optional
elsewhere .
Figure 1: MicroTech Baseboard
9 . Condensate Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binary
Input Description
Room or Return Air Temp & Tenant Override
Analog input may be used to measure Room or Return Air
temperature using a 10k NTC thermistor . The same analog
input is used to sense the position of the timed override switch
when a room sensor is applied . This sensor is mandatory in
the Fan Coil/Cabinet Unit Heater units unless the input value is
provided through network communications .
Condensate Overflow
Analog input may be used to detect the presence of water in
condensate pan . While the input is analog (microOhms), the
result of the algorithm is binary (dry or wet) . If the value is
below 2 .5 microOhms, the pan is dry . If the value is above 2 .5
microOhms, the pan is wet . Ultimately the pan is considered
dry for analog inputs above 1 .8 VDC .
Local Setpoint Adjust
Analog input may be used to determine hardwired setpoint
position based on a 1.5K Ω potentiometer that is mounted
on the room temperature sensor . Setpoint is at its minimum
value at 0 Ohms (0 .0 VDC), maximum value at 1 .5K Ohms
(3 .0 VDC) . Range of input is determined by the setting of an
equipment configuration bit. Long range input is limited by
Max and Min clamp settings . Either “Short” or “Long” range is
selected during the unit order and preset at the Daikin factory .
See “nciSoftJumpers” in Table 18 for specification details.
• If “Short Range” is selected, the nvoSetptShift variables
are used .
• If “Long Range” is selected, the nvoSetpoint variable is
used .
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
124
Discharge Air Temperature (DAT)
Analog input may be used to measure discharge air
temperature sensor using a 10k NTC thermistor .
Heat/Cool/Auto Mode Switch
Analog input may be used to determine the position of the
heat/cool/auto mode switch. Input DC voltages are defined as
follows: 0 .0v = Cool, 1 .0v = Auto, 2 .5v = Heat, 5 .0v = Switch is
not present .
Freeze Fault Detection
Binary input may be used to detect the position of a low
discharge air temperature freeze fault detection switch . The
sensor part of the switch is installed in the air stream . If the
contact on the switch is open, the temperature in the air stream
is below freezing (alarm active) . If the contact on the
4
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
MIcrotech BaseBoard
MIcrotech BaseBoard
switch is closed, the temperature in the air stream is above
freezing (alarm inactive) . Must use “nciSoftJumpers” to enable
or disable this input . See Table 18 . Input span is 0 .0 to 3 .6
VDC, with a threshold of 1 .5 VDC .
• Low Speed:
NOTE: Freezestat sensor should be provided from the
factory or field-supplied
• Medium Speed:
This binary output is used to operate the fan at low
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at low
speed .
This binary output is used to operate the fan at medium
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at
medium speed .
Occupancy Sensor
Binary input may be used to detect the position of an
occupancy sensor . This could be a motion detector or a time
clock . Open sensor contact represents occupied, closed
sensor contact represents unoccupied . Network-effective
occupancy has priority over position of this input . Input span
is 0 .7 (unoccupied) to 5 .0 VDC (occupied), with a threshold of
2 .85 VDC .
• High Speed:
This binary output is used to operate the fan at high
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at
high speed .
Two-Position Damper Output
NOTE: Note: Occupancy sensor is field-supplied
Control Outputs
Binary output may be used to open a fresh air ventilation
damper . If the output is de-energized, the damper is closed . If
the output is energized, the damper is open .
The MicroTech baseboard provides the following Binary
Outputs:
Room Sensor Status Output
Binary output may be used to energize and de-energize an
indicator located on the room sensor . See Room Sensor Status
Output Annunciation Table below .
1 . Fan Low Speed
2 . Fan Medium Speed
3 . Fan High Speed
Status Annunciation Tables
4 . Valve Output #1
5 . Valve Output #2
Table 1: Room Sensor Status Output Annunciation Table
6 . Valve Output #3/Electric Heat S1
8 . Fresh (Outside) Air Damper – 2-Position only .
9 . Room Sensor Status Output
Output Description
Each binary output is either a relay with normally-open
contacts or a triac . A triac is treated like a relay with normallyopen contacts . In other words, energizing the triac is like
closing a normally-open contact .
Indicator
Off Time (Sec)
Alarm Active:
Specific Alarm Determines
Number of Flashes (See
Alarms section)
0 .3
0 .3
(1 .3 Between Cycles)
Calibration or Network
Wink Active
3 .0
3 .0
Service Test Mode
0 .0
Continually
Unoccupied Mode
0 .5
5 .5
Standby Mode
5 .5
0 .5
Continually
0 .0
Occupied, Bypass Mode
* Annunciation conditions are listed in order of priority .
Fan Speed Outputs
Table 2: Baseboard Diagnostic LED Annunciation Table
There are three fan speed outputs on baseboard, and three
fan speed outputs on I/O expansion board . The two separate
fans operate in unison . In other words – if the low speed
output on baseboard is energized, the low speed output on
I/O expansion board is also energized, etc . If all three outputs
are de-energized, the fan motor is off . Only a single type (low,
medium, high) of speed output shall be turned on when fan
operation is required .
www .DaikinApplied .com
Indicator
On Time (Sec)
Condition *
7 . Valve Output #4
5
Diagnostic LED State
Condition
LED #1: On Steady
Normal I/O Expansion Board SPI Communications
LED #1: Flashing
Failed I/O Expansion Board SPI Communications
LED #2: On Steady
Normal Comm Module SPI Communications
LED #2: Flashing
Failed Comm Module SPI Communications
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3125
Addendum OM 1111
I/o expansIon Module
I/o expansIon Module
The I/O Expansion Module is an extension of the main board
and provides extra functionality to the MicroTech control
system . The MicroTech unit controller in combination with the
I/O Expansion Module will be the standard control system for
ThinLine Fan Coils and Cabinet Unit Heaters . See Figure 2 .
Adding an I/O Expansion Module (with an interconnect cable)
to the main controller allows:
• Economizer Control
• Second Fan Motor Control
• Additional control inputs
I/O Expansion Board Inputs & Outputs
I/O expansion Board accepts the following inputs:
Outdoor(Fresh) Air Temperature (OAT)
Analog input may be used to measure outdoor air temperature
using a 10k NTC thermistor .
Dirty Air Filter
Binary input may be used to detect Dirty Filter2 condition . Dirty
air filter alarm is active when the input contact opens. Must use
“nciSoftJumpers” to enable or disable this input . See Table 18
for details . Input span is 0 .0 to 3 .6 VDC, with a threshold of 1 .5
VDC .
2
Currently Dirty Filter input uses timer signal only .
1 . Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) – analog
Humidistat [future option]
2 . Dirty Air Filter – binary
Binary input may be used to detect humidistat position . Contact
closes when dehumidification is required. This feature is only
allowed for 4-Pipe Heating & Cooling systems with modulating
valves and 2-Pipe Cooling-only systems . Input span is 0 .0 to
3 .6 VDC, with a threshold of 1 .5 VDC .
1
3 . Emergency Shutdown Detection – binary [Future option]
4 . Humidistat – binary [Future option]
1
Input Description
Currently Dirty Filter indication uses timer only
Figure 2: MicroTech I/O Expansion Module
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
126
6
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
I/o expansIon Module
Output Description
Second Fan Motor Speed Outputs
I/O Expansion Board provides the following binary Outputs:
There are three fan speed outputs on baseboard, and three
fan speed outputs on I/O expansion board . The two separate
fans operate in unison . In other words – if the low speed
output on baseboard is energized, the low speed output on
I/O expansion board is also energized, etc . If all three outputs
are de-energized, the fan motor is off . Only a single type (low,
medium, high) of speed output shall be turned on when fan
operation is required .
1 . Economizer Open
2 . Economizer Closed
3 . Fan Low Speed
4 . Fan Medium Speed
5 . Fan High Speed
• Low Speed:
Economizer Control Outputs
This binary output is used to operate the fan at low
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at low
speed .
I/O expansion board binary outputs 1 and 2 are may be used
for economizer control . Output #1 drives the economizer
toward the open position . Output #2 drives the economizer
toward the closed position .
• Medium Speed:
This binary output is used to operate the fan at medium
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at
medium speed .
Emergency Shutdown [future option]
Binary input may be used to detect an emergency shutdown
condition . Shutdown occurs when the input contact opens .
Must use “nciSoftJumpers” to enable or disable this input .
See Table 18 for details . Input span is 0 .0 to 3 .6 VDC, with a
threshold of 1 .5 VDC .
• High Speed:
This binary output is used to operate the fan at high
speed . If this output is energized, the fan operates at
high speed .
Table 3: I/O Expansion Board Diagnostic LED
Annunciation Table
LED
On Time (Sec)
LED
Off Time (Sec)
SPI Communications Receive
(RX) Fail
0 .5
0 .5
SPI Communications Transmit
(TX) Fail (From Baseboard)
2 .5
2 .5
Continually
0 .0
Condition *
Normal SPI Communications
* Annunciation conditions are listed in order of priority .
www .DaikinApplied .com
7
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3127
Addendum OM 1111
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
Figure 3: MicroTech Unit Controller & I/O Expansion Module Connectors Descriptions
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
128
8
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
MicroTech Unit Controller
Table 4: MicroTech Unit Controller Terminals & Descriptions
Baseboard Connector – Terminal #
H1-1
H1-2
H2-4
H2-3
H2-2
H2-1
H3-1
H3-2
H3-3
H3-4
H3-5
H3-6
H4-1
H4-2
H5-1
H5-2
H5-3
H5-4
H5-5
H5-6
H5-7
H5-8
H5-9
H5-10
H6-1
H6-2
H6-3
H6-4
H6-5
H6-6
H7-1
H7-2
H8-1
H8-2
H8-3
H8-4
B1
TB1-1
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
TB1-5
TB1-6
TB2-1
TB2-2
LINE1
LINE2(N)
www .DaikinApplied .com
Silk Screen Label
24VAC
GND
BO3
BO2
BO1
NEUTRAL
BO4
BO5
COM
BO6
BO7
COM
BO8
COM
I/O BOARD INTERFACE
AI1
AI3
AI4
AI7
BO9
COM
BI1
24VAC
AI5
COM
AI6
COM
AI2
AI1
AI3
A14
AI7
BO9
COM
BI2
24VAC
LINE1
LINE2(N)
9
Description
24VAC Power Input
Ground
Fan High Speed Output
Fan Medium Speed Output
Fan Low Speed Output
Fan Neutral
Valve Output 1
Valve Output 2
Ground
Valve Output 3 or Electric Heat Stage 1
Valve Output 4
Ground
Damper Open
Ground
24VAC Power to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
+5V Power to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
+12V Power to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
SPI_CE1_1 to I/O Board
SPI_OUT_1 to I/O Board
SPI_IN_1 to I/O Board
SPI_CLK_1 to I/O Board
Room Temperature
SetPoint Adjust
Fan Mode Switch
Heat/Cool/Auto Switch
Room Sensor LED
Ground
Freeze Fault Detection
24VAC
Entering Water Temperature
Ground
Discharge Air Temperature
Ground
Condensate Overflow
Room Temperature
SetPoint Adjust
Fan Mode Switch
Heat/Cool/Auto Switch
Room Sensor LED
Ground
Unoccupied input
24VAC
Line Voltage/ECM Terminal
Neutral Terminal
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3129
Addendum OM 1111
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
Figure 4: MicroTech III Fan Coil I/O Expansion Board Connector Layout (not to scale)
I/O Expansion Module
Table 5: I/O Expansion Module Connectors/Terminals
IO Exp . Module Connector – Terminal #
H1-1
H1-2
H1-3
H1-4
H1-5
H1-6
H1-7
H1-8
H1-9
H1-10
H2-1
H2-2
H2-3
H3-4
H3-3
H3-2
H3-1
H4-1, TB4-1
H4-2, TB4-2
TB2-1
TB2-2
TB3-1
TB3-2
H5-1
H5-2
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
130
Silk Screen Label
UNIT CONTROLLER INTERFACE
BO1
BO2
COM
BO5
BO4
BO3
NEUTRAL
AI1
COM
BI1
24VAC
BI3
24VAC
BI2
24VAC
10
Description
SPI_CLK_1 to I/O Board
SPI_OUT_1 to I/O Board
SPI_IN_1 to I/O Board
SPI_CE1_1 to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
+12V Power to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
+5V Power to I/O Board
Ground to I/O Board
24VAC Power to I/O Board
Economizer Open output
Economizer Closed output
Ground
Fan High Speed
Fan Medium Speed
Fan Low Speed
Fan Neutral
Outdoor Air Temp
Ground
Emergency Shutdown signal
Emergency Shutdown 24VAC
Humidistat signal
Humidistat 24VAC
Dirty Air filter signal
Dirty Air Filter 24VAC
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
Figure 5: BACnet Communication Module
BACnet Communication Module
Table 6: BACnet Communication Module Connectors/Terminals
BACnet Module Connector – Terminal #
P3 – 1
P3 – 2
P3 – 3
P3 – 4
www .DaikinApplied .com
Silk Screen Label
P3
11
Description
Network Signal +
Network Signal –
REF
Shield
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3131
Addendum OM 1111
control Boards terMInals and connectors descrIptIons
Figure 6: LonWorks Communication Module
lonWorks Communication Module
Table 7: LON Communication Module Connectors/Terminals
lonWorks Module Connector – Terminal #
TB1 – 1
TB1 – 2
TB1 – 3
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
132
Silk Screen Label
TB1
12
Description
Network Signal A
Network Signal B
No Connection
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Possible FCU Machine States include:
The FCU primary operation depends on eight unit states of
operation . When power is applied or controller is reset, the
unit controller will go through a boot-up sequence, then go to
the “Off” unit state . Refer to Table 8 and Table 9 for the state
of every fan coil component in the Occupied and Unoccupied
(Standby) Modes .
• Off Alarm
• Off
• Start
(Actuator calibration occurs if applicable)
• Fan Only
(Fan is enabled, however may not be on)
• Heating
• Economizer
• Cooling (fan coils only)
• Dehumid [future option for Fan coils only: 2-Pipe
in Cooling mode or 4-Pipe Modulating Heat & Cool
Systems]
Fan Coil/Cabinet Unit Heater Control Output Tables
Table 8: UNOCCUPIED or STANDBY
(Economizer State & Dehumid State [future option] not allowed)
Off Alarm
Fan
Off
Start
Fan Only
Heating
Economizer
Cooling
Dehumid
[future option]
Off
Off
Off
Off
Highest
N/A
Highest
N/A
Cooling Valve
Note1
Closed2
Closed
Closed
Closed
N/A
Open
N/A
Heating Valve
Note 1
Closed2
Closed
Closed
Open
N/A
Closed
N/A
Electric Heat
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
N/A
Off
N/A
Damper
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
N/A
Closed
N/A
Economizer
Closed
Unchanged
Closed
Closed
Closed
N/A
Closed
N/A
Start
Fan Only
Heating
Economizer
Cooling
Dehumid
[future option]
Controlled
Table 9: OCCUPIED or BYPASS
(Economizer State allowed if enabled by Equipment Configuration)
Off Alarm
Fan
Off
Off
Off
Off
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Cooling Valve
Note1
Closed2
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Controlled
Open
Heating Valve
Note1
Closed2
Closed
Closed
Controlled
Closed
Closed
Controlled
Electric Heat
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Damper
Closed
Closed
Closed
Controlled3
Open
Open
Open
Open
Economizer
Closed
Unchanged
Closed
Closed,
Minimum4
Minimum
Controlled
Min to Open
Open,
Minimum5
Open,
Minimum5
1
2
3
4
5
Dependant on specific alarm, see “Alarm: Control & Reset Table”.
Two position valves closed, modulating valves are unchanged .
Damper open if fan is on, closed if fan is off
Economizer closed if fan is off, otherwise at minimum position per fan speed
Economizer open if available to cool, otherwise at min position per fan speed
Table 10: Fixed Timing Parameters Default Values
Fixed Timing Parameter
Normal
Condensate Overflow Alarm Activation Delay
60 sec
Dehumidification Minimum Off Timer
180 sec
Fan Runtime After Electric Heat Turnoff
30 sec
Fan Speed Change Timer
0 .2 sec
Room Temperature Sensor Failure Delay When Analog Input Is Shorted
4 min
Valve & Economizer Calibration Interval
24 hrs
www .DaikinApplied .com
13
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3133
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Table 11: Configuration Property Default Values
Configuration Property
Usable Range
Default Value
Description
nciBypassTime
0, 30 to 120 Min
120 m
Amount of time controller operates is in the bypass occupancy mode when the user
activates the timed override function .
nciSetpoints:Occ_cool
50 to 95 °F
75 °F
Occupied operating mode cooling setpoint .
nciSetpoints:Stby_cool
50 to 95 °F
77 °F
Standby operating mode cooling setpoint .
nciSetpoints:Unoc_cool
50 to 95 °F
85 °F
Unoccupied operating mode cooling setpoint .
nciSetpoints:Occ_heat
50 to 95 °F
70 °F
Occupied operating mode heating setpoint .
nciSetpoints:Stby_heat
50 to 95 °F
66 °F
Standby operating mode heating setpoint .
nciSetpoints:Unoc_heat
50 to 95 °F
60 °F
Unoccupied operating mode heating setpoint .
nciOccDiff
1 to 5 °F
1 °F
Differential between the effective on and off setpoints when operating in the occupied
mode .
nciUnoccDiff
2 to 10 °F
2 °F
Differential between the effective on and off setpoints when operating in the unoccupied
mode .
nciEwtFlowTimer
60 to 600 Sec
120 s
Length of time flow is allowed after opening a hydronic valve before sampling the EWT.
nciEwtSampleTmr
0, 20 to 120 Min
120 m
Length of time between EWT sampling processes .
nciFanMinOffTmr
120 to 1200 Sec
180 s
Minimum length of time the fan must remain off after it initially turns off .
nciFanMinOnTmr
120 to 1200 Sec
180 s
Minimum length of time the fan must remain running after it initially turns on .
nciFltrChangeHrs
0, 360 to 4320 Hr
1440 hr
Length of time the fan operates before a dirty air filter alarm is generated.
nciLocSptEnable
Disable, Enable
Enable
Variable to enable or disable the use of the local setpoint adjustment input from the room
sensor .
nciSptAdjMax
55 to 95 °F
95 °F
Long range setpoint adjust input maximum value .
nciSptAdjMin
55 to 95 °F
55 °F
Long range setpoint adjust input minimum value .
2 to 10 °F
5 °F
EWT must be warmer than the room temperature at least by this amount for hydronic
heating to be allowed in two pipe systems .
Hydronic Heating Control
nciHeatEnDiff
nciHeatIntStgTmr
120 to 1200 Sec
300 s
Inter stage time used between automatic heating capacity fan speed changes .
nciHeatKp
5 to 160 %
25 %
Hydronic heating valve PI control loop proportional gain setting .
nciHeatKi
0 to 1200 Sec
20 s
Hydronic heating valve PI control loop integral setting .
nciHeatDB
3 to 100 %
3%
Hydronic heating valve actuator positioning deadband .
15 to 600 Sec
180 s
2 to 10 °F
5 °F
EWT must be colder than the room temperature at least by this amount for hydronic cooling to be allowed in two pipe systems .
nciHeatVlvStroke
Hydronic heating valve actuator full travel time .
Hydronic Cooling Control
nciCoolEnDiff
nciCoolIntStgTmr
120 to 1200 Sec
300 s
Inter stage time used between automatic cooling capacity fan speed changes .
nciCoolKp
5 to 160 %
40 %
Hydronic cooling valve PI control loop proportional gain setting .
nciCoolKi
0 to 1200 Sec
30 s
Hydronic cooling valve PI control loop integral setting .
nciCoolDB
3 to 100 %
3%
Hydronic cooling valve actuator positioning deadband .
15 to 600 Sec
180 s
Hydronic cooling valve actuator full travel time .
nciDaSptKp
5 to 160 %
40 %
Discharge air temperature setpoint PI control loop proportional gain setting .
nciDaSptKi
0 to 1200 Sec
20 s
Discharge air temperature setpoint PI control loop integral setting .
nciMaxDaSpt
50 to 80 °F
75 °F
Economizer PI control block setpoint maximum value when the discharge air PI control
loop output is at 0% .
nciMinDaSpt
50 to 80 °F
55 °F
Economizer PI control block setpoint minimum value when the discharge air PI control
loop output is at 100% .
nciEconOaEnDiff
1 to 12 °F
2 °F
Outdoor air temperature must be colder than the room temperature at least by this
amount for Economizer cooling to be allowed .
nciEconOaEnSpt
40 to 80 °F
50 °F
Outdoor air temperature must be above this setpoint to allow Economizer cooling .
nciEconKp
5 to 160 %
90 %
Economizer positioning PI control loop proportional gain setting .
nciEconKi
0 to 1200 Sec
10 s
Economizer positioning PI control loop integral setting .
nciEconDB
3 to 100 %
3%
Economizer actuator positioning deadband setting .
nciEconStroke
15 to 600 Sec
66 s
Economizer actuator full travel time .
nciEconLowMin
0 to 100 %
10 %
Economizer minimum position when the fan is operating at low speed .
nciEconMedMin
0 to 100 %
10 %
Economizer minimum position when the fan is operating at medium speed .
nciEconHighMin
0 to 100 %
10 %
Economizer minimum position when the fan is operating at high speed .
nciCoolVlvStroke
Economizer Cooling Control
Note: Reference the ED15135 protocol information document for more details on configuration properties and other network variables.
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
134
14
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Operating Modes
Occupied Capacity Control
Start-up
Occupied Operation
The unit will not operate until all the inputs and safety controls
are checked for normal conditions .
The board will be in Occupied mode if the unoccupied terminal
(BI2) is not shorted to ground . Heating and cooling will not
operate until the fan is running .
General Sequences of Operation
Cooling
If the room temperature is above the Occupied Cooling On
Setpoint in the fan Auto Cycling mode, the fan will start before
the cooling state is entered . After the fan is on, the cooling
valve will open (two position valves) or a proportional-integral
control algorithm will modulate the cooling valve open in an
attempt to maintain the room temperature .
Fan Operation
The Table 12 describes fan operation in the various controller
modes . Fan operation depends on the occupied/unoccupied
status of the controller, the position of the room sensor
mounted (or unit mounted) fan speed switch, and the capacity
requested from the control algorithm .
Table 12: Fan Mode
Fan Mode
Occupied
Unoccupied
Off
Off
Off
Low
Low speed, continuous
operation
Fan runs on low speed
when heating or cooling
capacity is required . Fan
is off otherwise .
Medium
Medium speed,
continuous operation
Fan runs on medium
speed when heating
or cooling capacity is
required . Fan is off
otherwise .
High
High speed, continuous
operation
Fan runs on high speed
when heating or cooling
capacity is required . Fan
is off otherwise .
Auto – Continuous
Fan runs continuously
on low, medium or high
depending on capacity
required .
Fan runs on high speed
when heating or cooling
capacity is required . Fan
is off otherwise .
Auto – Cycling
When no capacity is
required, fan is off and
damper is closed . When
capacity is required, fan
runs on low, medium
or high depending on
capacity required .
Fan runs on high speed
when heating or cooling
capacity is required . Fan
is off otherwise .
Occupied/Unoccupied Operation
The occupied/unoccupied operation of the unit is either
controlled from the occupied/unoccupied binary input or over
the communications network . When in the occupied mode,
the controller will control to the occupied heating and cooling
setpoints . In the unoccupied mode, unoccupied heating and
cooling setpoints will be used . Fan operation is as described
above . Heating and cooling operation will not be enabled
until the fan is running . When the occupied/unoccupied state
of the controller is being controlled over the communications
interface, the local binary input will be ignored .
www .DaikinApplied .com
If the temperature remains above the Occupied Cooling On
Setpoint for longer than a cooling stage time when the cooling
valve is full open and the fan is on Low speed (auto fan mode),
the fan will stage to Medium speed in an attempt to satisfy the
load . If the temperature remains above the Occupied Cooling
On Setpoint for longer than a cooling stage time when the
cooling valve is full open and the fan is on Medium speed (auto
fan mode), the fan will stage to High speed in an attempt to
satisfy the load .
If the temperature is below the Cooling On Setpoint and the
cooling Interstage timer has expired, the fan will stage from
High to Medium speed . If the temperature is below the Cooling
On Setpoint and the cooling Interstage timer has expired, the
fan will stage from Medium to Low speed . If the temperature
remains below the Cooling Off Setpoint for longer than the
cooling stage time and the fan is at its lowest fan speed ,
cooling valve will close and the unit will enter the “Fan Only”
state . When the Fan Minimum On timer has expired, the fan
will turn off if fan cycling is enabled .
Heating
If the room temperature is below the Occupied Heating On
Setpoint in the fan auto cycling mode, the fan will start before
the heating state is entered . After the fan is on, the heating
valve will open (two position valves), the electric heat will
be enabled, or a proportional-integral control algorithm will
modulate the heating valve open in an attempt to maintain the
room temperature .
If the temperature remains below the Occupied Heating On
Setpoint for longer than a heating stage time when the heating
valve is full open and the fan is on Low speed (auto fan mode),
the fan will stage to Medium speed in an attempt to satisfy the
load . If the temperature remains below the Occupied Heating
On Setpoint for longer than a heating stage time when the
heating valve is full open and the fan is on Medium speed
(auto fan mode), the fan will stage to High speed in an attempt
to satisfy the load .
15
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3135
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
If the temperature is above the Heating On Setpoint and
the heating Interstage timer has expired, the fan will stage
from High to Medium speed . If the temperature is above
the Heating On setpoint and the heating Interstage timer
has expired, the fan will stage from Medium to Low speed . If
the temperature remains above the Heating Off Setpoint for
longer than the heating stage time and the fan is at its lowest
fan speed the heating valve will close, electric heat will shut
off, and the unit will enter the Fan Only state . When the Fan
Minimum On and the Fan On After Electric Heat timers have
expired, the fan will turn off if fan cycling is enabled .
4-Pipe Modulating Heating & Cooling System:
• Fan is on at speed determined by capacity and effective
fan mode/speed .
• Heating valve is controlled .
General Operation
Unit status will change to the “Fan Only” state if all of the
following conditions exist:
• Dehumidification isn’t required or is not available, heating
or cooling capacity becomes required .
• The cooling valve has been driven closed .
Unoccupied Capacity Control
• The 4-pipe system heating valve has been driven closed .
• Fan is running at the lowest possible speed based on:
selected occupancy and fan mode/speed switch setting .
Cooling
When the room temperature rises above the Unoccupied
Cooling On Setpoint, the fan will start in High speed and the
cooling valve will fully open in an attempt to maintain room
temperature. When the temperature is satisfied (temperature
drops below the Unoccupied Cooling On Setpoint minus the
unoccupied differential) and the cooling Interstage timer has
expired, the valve will first close and then the fan will shut off.
Heating
When the room temperature falls below the Unoccupied
Heating On Setpoint, the fan will start in High speed and
the heating valve will fully open (or the electric heat will
be enabled) in an attempt to maintain room temperature .
When the temperature is satisfied (temperature rises above
the Unoccupied Heating On Setpoint plus the unoccupied
differential) and the heating Interstage timer has expired, the
valve will first close, electric heat will shut off and then the fan
will shut off .
Dehumid State Notes
• For dehumidification availability definition, see
“Miscellaneous Control Definitions section”.
• When leaving “Dehumid” state, the 180 second fixed
“dehumidification minimum off” timer will be started. This
prevents returning back to the “Dehumid” state too soon .
Total Electric Heat mode (2-pipe Cooling
systems only)
On an initial call for heating:
1 . The fan will start at Low speed in “Fan Only” state
2 . Unit enters Heating state, electric heat is energized, and
heating Interstage timer is started
3 . If Heating Interstage Countdown Timer has expired and
room temperature is below the Heating On Setpoint, fan
speed will be changed from Low to Medium, and Heating
Interstage Countdown Timer is started again .
Dehumidification Operation [future option]
This fan coil state is allowed for: 2-Pipe in Cooling only or
4-Pipe Modulating Heating & Cooling systems; and controller
must be in the occupied or bypass mode . Modulating Cooling
valve is fully open . Electric heat is off . Fresh Air Damper (if
available) is open . Economizer, if available, will be fully open,
otherwise at minimum position based on fan speed .
2-Pipe Cooling Only System:
• Fan is on at lowest available speed .
• Heating valve is non-existent .
• Dehumidification is only allowed when the effective space
temperature is greater than the effective heating on
setpoint, and becomes disabled when space temperature
drops below the effective heating on setpoint minus a 2°F
fixed differential.
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
136
4 . If Heating Interstage Countdown Timer has expired and
room temperature is below the Heating On Setpoint,
fan speed will be changed from Medium to High, and
Heating Interstage Countdown Timer is started again .
Once room temperature reaches the Heating On Setpoint
the fan will be run at Medium and Low speed with Interstage
Countdown Timer started each time the fan speed is changed .
When the room setpoint conditions are satisfied, electric heat
will be de-energized and the fan will continue to operate at its
“fan only” setting when enabled, for continuous fan operation .
If fan cycling is enabled, the fan will turn off after 30 seconds
once room setpoint conditions are satisfied.
16
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Supplemental (Intermediate) Electric Heat mode [for
2-pipe Cooling/Heating systems only]
CAUTION
Adjusting PI parameters can cause erratic unit
operation, and potentially damage the equipment .
On an initial call for heating, the controller will open the
water valve for Flow Timer” to check for appropriate entering
water temperature . Once the water valve is 100% open,
a 120-second (default setting) flow timer will start and flow
allowed . When timer has expired and if water temperature is
colder than required for hydronic heating the control valve will
fully closed, fan started and electric heater energized . The
rest of the operation will run as described in paragraph Total
Electric heat above exclusively using electric heat (EWT is not
sampled for systems with Total Electric Heat) .
PI control parameters must only be adjusted by trained
personnel having a complete understanding of how
these parameters affect system operation . Generally
these parameters do not need to be adjusted from the
factory settings .
Proportional Gain
PI Control Algorithm
The proportional gain, or proportional action, causes the
controlled output to change in proportion to the magnitude of
the present error amount . Error is the difference between the
sensors present value and the set point . When the Kp setting
is too low, the process variable (PV) response will change too
slowly . When the Kp setting is too high, the process variable
response will excessively overshoot and possibly oscillate
around the setpoint (SP) . If faster system response is desired
increase the proportional gain (Kp) setting . Use caution not
to become too aggressive with the proportional gain setting to
avoid causing system instability .
The PI control algorithm calculates the desired actuator output,
and ranges from 0 to 100% .
Integral Time
Proportional–Integral Control Parameters
Associated with each Proportional-Integral (PI) control loop
are three adjustable parameters: Proportional Gain (Kp),
Integral Time (Ki), and Deadband (DB) . When the fan coil unit
(FCU) is properly sized for the space, the factory settings for
these parameters will provide the best control action for all the
various operating scenarios .
• Process Variable (PV): Measured analog input reading .
The integral time, or integral action, accumulates the error
amounts and causes the controlled output to approach the set
point over time in an attempt to eliminate any system offset .
The smaller the integral (Ki) setting, the more the integral will
affect the process under control . When the Ki setting is too
low, the process variable (PV) will oscillate around the setpoint .
When the Ki setting is too high, the process variable will never
reach the setpoint .
• Sample Time: Scan rate of the PI control blocks, which is
an internal fixed value of 10 seconds.
Deadband
Definitions:
• Error: Value is calculated one of two ways depending on
the PI blocks fixed action type.
Direct Acting Block: Error = (PV – SP)
Reverse Acting Block: Error = (SP – PV)
• Sum of Errors: Summation, or total, of all past errors .
Output Formula:
PI Output = (Kp × Error) + ((Sample Time × Sum of Past
Errors) / Ki)
If field problems arise, first ensure these parameters are set
back to the factory default settings . If adjustment is required,
only make small adjustments to one parameter at a time . After
each adjustment, induce an instantaneous error into the PI
algorithm and allow enough time for the system to stabilize
before making any further modifications. If you do not have the
means to graph the process variable performance, record the
actual measured value and set point for the duration of the test
and then plot the results using a spreadsheet to determine the
correct action to take .
www .DaikinApplied .com
17
The deadband parameter serves two main purposes . First
deadband prevents the actuator from constantly hunting or
overcorrecting, and secondly ensures the actuator physically
moves every time a new positioning command is given .
Deadband will prevent small output changes from modifying
the actuator position. When the deadband configuration
property is set to 3%, the PI control output adjustment must
exceed plus or minus 1 .5%, or the actuator position will not be
changed .
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3137
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
PI Control Blocks
The fan coil unit contains four PI control loop blocks . The PI
control blocks are defined as follows:
Inputs / Outputs
Interpretation
1 . Modulating Hydronic Heating Valve
Polarity Type: Direct Acting (Not
Adjustable)
Error is defined as: (Room Temp
minus Effective Cool SP)
2 . Modulating Hydronic Cooling Valve
SP: Effective Cooling Setpoint
The desired cooling setpoint input .
3 . Economizer Discharge Air Temperature (DAT) Setpoint
PV: nvoSpaceTemp (AV-22)
Room temperature is used as the
process variable input .
4 . Economizer Position
KP: nciDASptKp (Loop3:Proportional_
Constant)
Proportional gain used in the PI
control algorithm .
KI: nciDASptKi (Loop3:Integral_
Constant)
Integral time used in the PI control
algorithm .
Output: nvoDASptOut
(Loop3:Present_Value)
Economizer position output command .
Translator: nciMaxDaSpt (AV-11)
Translated DA temperature SP that is
sent to PI block #4 when the PI output
is at 0% .
Translator: nciMinDaSpt (AV-12)
Translated DA temperature SP that is
sent to PI block #4 when the PI output
is at 100% .
The following is a brief summary of the fan coil PI control
blocks and their associated support functions . Applicable
LonWorks network variables are listed first, along with their
BACnet equivalent objects . Refer to the ED15135 protocol
information document for more details pertaining to the fan coil
network variables .
Table 13: PI Control Block #1 – Modulating Hydronic
Heating Valve Control
Inputs / Outputs
Interpretation
Polarity Type: Reverse Acting (Not
Adjustable)
Error is defined as: (Effective Heat SP
minus Room Temp)
SP: Effective Heating Setpoint
The desired heating setpoint input .
PV: nvoSpaceTemp (AV-22)
Room temperature is used as the
process variable input .
KP: nciHeatKp (Loop1:Proportional_
Constant)
Proportional gain used in the PI
control algorithm .
KI: nciHeatKi (Loop1:Integral_
Constant)
Integral time used in the PI control
algorithm .
Output: nvoHeatVlvOut
(Loop1:Present_Value)
Heating valve position output
command .
DB: nciHeatDB (AV-29)
Deadband used to determine if the PI
output is applied to the heating valve
positioning control .
Table 14: PI Control Block #2 – Modulating Hydronic
Cooling Valve Control
Inputs / Outputs
Interpretation
Polarity Type: Direct Acting (Not
Adjustable)
Error is defined as: (Room Temp
minus Effective Cool SP)
SP: Effective Cooling Setpoint
The desired cooling setpoint input .
PV: nvoSpaceTemp (AV-22)
Room temperature is used as the
process variable input .
KP: nciCoolKp (Loop2:Proportional_
Constant)
Proportional gain used in the PI
control algorithm .
KI: nciCoolKi (Loop2:Integral_
Constant)
Integral time used in the PI control
algorithm .
Output: nvoCoolVlvOut
(Loop2:Present_Value)
Cooling valve position output
command .
DB: nciCoolDB (AV-9)
Deadband used to determine if the PI
output is applied to the cooling valve
positioning control .
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
138
Table 15: PI Control Block #3 – Economizer Discharge Air
Setpoint Control
Table 16: PI Control Block #4 – Economizer Position
Control
Inputs / Outputs
Interpretation
Polarity Type: Direct Acting (Not
Adjustable)
Error is defined as: (DAT minus
Discharge Air SP)
SP: Discharge Air SP from PI Control
Block #3 Output
The desired DAT setpoint input . The
PI block #3 output is translated into a
discharge air temperature SP value .
PV: nvoDischAirTemp (AI-4)
Discharge air temperature is used as
the process variable input .
KP: nciDASptKp (Loop4:Proportional_
Constant)
Proportional gain used in the PI
control algorithm .
KI: nciDASptKi (Loop4:Integral_
Constant)
Integral time used in the PI control
algorithm .
Output: nvoEconOut (Loop4:Present_
Value)
Economizer position output command .
DB: nciEconDB (AV-18)
Deadband used to determine if the PI
output is applied to the Economizer
positioning control .
18
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
Fan coIl/caBInet unIt heater unIt control
Tuning the PI Blocks
10 . Adjust Ki based on the following graph::
If the temperature control behavior of the FCU is poor, it may
be necessary to tune the PI control blocks of the cooling valve,
heating valve, or economizer position . When tuning the control
blocks, it is highly recommended that you follow the below
procedure . Failure to do so may result in increased tuning time,
and sub-par performance .
1 . Zero out the Ki setting .
2 . Choose a starting point for Kp
3 . Introduce a step change to the room setpoint .
4 . Observe FCU performance and temperature control
11 . Repeat steps 8-10 until the FCU temperature control
is acceptable . There should be no offset error and no
temperature oscillations when the loops are fully and
correctly tuned .
5 . Adjust Kp based on the following graph:
6 . Repeat steps 3-5 until the temperature control matches
the acceptable Kp behavior in the above graph . Behavior
should be somewhere between the two “Kp OK” system
responses detailed above . Please note that there may be
an offset error after the Kp value is tuned . This is OK, as
the Ki variable will eliminate the offset error .
NOTE: The PI blocks controlling the economizer behavior (PI
Control Block #3 & PI Control Block #4) are used in a
‘cascade’ arrangement, meaning the output of block
#3 directly affects the behavior and output of block
#4 . If changes to the behavior of these blocks are
needed, then both blocks should be tuned, to avoid
negatively affecting the performance by just changing
one of the control blocks . Block # 4 should be tuned
first, followed by block #3. In addition, the PI control
for the economizer behavior may be affected by
the minimum damper position, or the minimum or
maximum setpoint outputs (nciMaxDaSpt (AV-11)
and nciMinDaSpt (AV-12)) . If erratic temperature
control behavior is exhibited, it should be investigated
whether the PI block or these other settings are
negatively affecting the performance .
7 . While keeping Kp constant, choose a starting value for Ki
8 . Introduce a step change to the room setpoint .
9 . Observe FCU performance and temperature control
www .DaikinApplied .com
19
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3139
Addendum OM 1111
alarMs
alarMs
Alarm Control Modes
• Display Only: Full control is maintained, alarm is for
display purposes only .
• Modified: Normal unit control is slightly modified by this
type of alarm .
• Shutdown #1: Fan & electric heat immediately turned off;
damper & economizer closed; valves are unchanged .
• Shutdown #2: Fan & electric heat immediately turned off;
damper & economizer closed; all valve types closed .
• Shutdown #3: Fan & electric heat immediately turned
off; damper & economizer closed; previous control mode
valve type is opened .
Table 17: Alarm Control & Reset Table
Room Sensor LED
Pulses
Alarm Definition
Control Type
Auto Recover
Tenant Override Button
Reset
2
Invalid Equipment
Configuration
Remote Clear Alarm
3
Emergency Shutdown
Shutdown #1
No
No
No
Shutdown #2
Yes
No
4
No
Freeze Fault Detection
Shutdown #3
No
Yes
Yes
5
Entering Water Temp
Sensor Fail (EWT
Sampling Systems)
Shutdown #2
No
No
Yes
6
Room Temp Sensor Fail
Shutdown #2
No
No
Yes
7
IO Expansion
Communications Fail (IO
Exp Board Selected)
Shutdown #2
Yes
No
No
8
Condensate Overflow
(Econ, Cool, & Dehumid
Modes Only) (Fixed 60s
Delay)
Shutdown #2
Yes1
No
Yes
9
Outdoor Air Temp
Sensor Fail (Economizer
Selected)
Modified: Disable
Economizer
No
No
Yes
10
Discharge Air Temp
Sensor Fail (Economizer
Selected)
Modified: Disable
Economizer
No
No
Yes
11
Dirty Air Filter (currently
based on settable timer)2
Display Only
No
Yes
Yes
12
Serial EEPROM
Corrupted
Display Only
No
No
No
1) Auto recover is subject to intelligent alarm reset
2) Timer is user-adjustable through network . Setting timer to 0 (zero) disables the alarm . Refer to ED 15135 for more details Alarm conditions are listed
in order of priority .
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
140
20
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
MIscellaneous control deFInItIons
MIscellaneous control deFInItIons
Heating Capacity Required
Dehumidification Availability
Heating capacity is considered “required” when Effective
Space Temperature (nvoSpaceTemp) goes below calculated
effective heating on setpoint; then becomes “not required”
when the temperature goes above calculated effective heating
off setpoint .
Dehumidification is considered available if all of the following
conditions exist:
Cooling Capacity Required
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) states that a 2-Pipe hydronic cooling
only without electric heat; or 4-Pipe hydronic modulating
heating and cooling system is selected in the fan coil unit .
• For 2-Pipe Cooling only systems the Effective Space
Temperature (nvoSpaceTemp) must be above the
Effective Heating On setpoint .
Cooling capacity is considered “required” when Effective
Space Temperature (nvoSpaceTemp) goes above calculated
effective cooling on setpoint; then becomes “not required”
when the temperature goes below calculated effective cooling
off setpoint . Economizer state, if available, has priority over
cooling state .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is set to
“Auto”, “Dehumid”, or “Null” .
• Local Heat/Cool/Auto mode switch (nvoHeatCoolAuto) is
set to “Auto” or “Cool” .
• I/O expansion board communications is not failed .
Dehumidification Required
Dehumidification is considered “required” when the humidistat
binary input is active, and no heating or cooling capacities are
required . Also in 2-Pipe cooling only systems, the effective
space temperature (nvoSpaceTemp) must be greater than the
effective heating on setpoint for dehumidification to be allowed
• Effective occupancy (nvoEffectOccup) is occupied or
bypass mode .
• The fixed “dehumidification minimum off” timer has
expired .
• Condensate overflow alarm is not active.
Economizer Availability
Fan Availability
Economizer is considered available if all of the following
conditions exist:
Fan is considered available if all of the following conditions
exist:
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) has selected a valid fan speed type .
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) states economizer is present in the fan
coil unit .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is not set to
“Off” .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is set to
“Auto”, “Economy”, or “Null” .
• Local hardwired fan mode/speed switch
(nvoFanModeSpdSw) is not set to “Off” .
• Local Heat/Cool/Auto mode switch (nvoHeatCoolAuto) is
set to “Auto” or “Cool” .
• The “fan minimum off” timer has expired .
• Effective occupancy (nvoEffectOccup) is occupied or
bypass mode .
• Difference between indoor and outdoor air temperature
is greater than economizer indoor to outdoor air control
enable differential (nciEconIOAEnDiff) setting for ability to
cool. Prevents using outdoor air that’s too hot.
• Outdoor air temperature is greater than economizer
outdoor air temperature control enable (nciEconOAEn)
setting. Prevents using outdoor air that’s too cold.
• I/O expansion board communications failure alarm is not
active .
• Condensate overflow alarm is not active.
• Outdoor air temperature sensor failure alarm is not active .
• Discharge air temperature sensor failure alarm is not
active .
www .DaikinApplied .com
21
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3141
Addendum OM 1111
MIscellaneous control deFInItIons
MIscellaneous control deFInItIons
Electric Heating Availability
Hydronic Cooling Availability
Electric heating is considered available if all of the following
conditions exist:
Hydronic cooling is considered available if all of the following
conditions exist:
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) states electric heating is selected in the
fan coil unit .
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) states hydronic cooling is selected in
the fan coil unit .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is set to
“Auto”, “Heat”, or “Null” .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is set to
“Auto”, “Cool”, or “Null” .
• Local Heat/Cool/Auto mode switch (nvoHeatCoolAuto) is
set to “Auto” or “Heat” .
• Local Heat/Cool/Auto mode switch (nvoHeatCoolAuto) is
set to “Auto” or “Cool” .
• Condensate overflow alarm is not active.
Hydronic Heating Availability
Hydronic heating is considered available if all of the following
conditions exist:
• Equipment configuration software jumper
(nciSoftJumpers) states hydronic heating is selected in
the fan coil unit .
• Remote application mode (nviApplicMode) is set to
“Auto”, “Heat”, or “Null” .
• Local Heat/Cool/Auto mode switch (nvoHeatCoolAuto) is
set to “Auto” or “Heat” .
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
142
22
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx a
appendIx a
4 . Holding board in grounded hand, install board in unit .
Replacing a MicroTech Circuit Board
5 . Insert faulty board in empty static bag for return .
WARNING
The MicroTech circuit board incorporates static
sensitive de-vices . A static charge from touching the
device can damage the electronic components . To help
prevent damage during service, use static discharge
wrist straps . Static discharge wrist straps are grounded
to the fan coil chassis through a 1 MOhm resistor .
Replacement part is shipped from Daikin with correct
configuration preset at the factory.
1 . Connect grounding wrist strap to unit .
2 . Remove faulty board and place on static protected
surface .
3 . Remove replacement board from static protected bag .
NOTE: The new board needs to have correct equipment
configuration performed at the factory otherwise
it will not operate properly . Contact Daikin factory
representative for directions .
Equipment Configuration Settings
Configuration property variable are used to determine the
equipment configuration; which are read from the serial
EEPROM when the controller initially boots . The FCU control
option bits are then initialized based on the “nciSoftJumpers”
values read from the serial EEPROM . The controller must be
rebooted after modifying the software configuration settings
before they will be used in controlling the FCU . Setting is
considered: open when bit is zero, and closed when bit is one .
Do not touch circuit board; hold by edges .
Table 18: Equipment Configuration Setting Options
Function
Bit/Binary Setting
Model/Feature
Service Test Mode
Byte 1: b0
0 = Normal Operation
1 = Service Test Mode
Continuous/Cycling Fan
Byte 1: b1
0 = Continuous Fan
1 = Cycling Fan
Setpoint Adjust – Temperature Range
Byte 1: b2
0 = Short Range (-5 to +5 °F)
1 = Long Range (55 to 95 °F)
IO Expansion Board Selection
Byte 1: b3
0 = No IO Expansion Board Present
1 = Enable IO Expansion Board
Economizer Selection
Byte 1: b4
0 = No Economizer Present
1 = Enable Economizer Use
N .O ./N .C . Two Position Heating Valve
Byte 1: b5
0 = Normally Open Heating Valve
1 = Normally Closed Heating Valve
N .O ./N .C . Two Position Cooling Valve
Byte 1: b6
0 = Normally Open Cooling Valve
1 = Normally Closed Cooling Valve
Two Position/Modulating Valves
Byte 1: b7
0 = Two position Hydronic Valves
1 = Modulating Hydronic Valves
Byte 2: b1=0, b0=0
Byte 2: b1=0, b0=1
Byte 2: b1=1, b0=0
00 = No Electric Heating
01 = One Stage Electric Heat
10 = Two Stage Electric Heat (Future)
11 = Not Valid
Hydronic Valves Selection
Byte 2: b4=0, b3=0, b2=0
Byte 2: b4=0, b3=0, b2=1
Byte 2: b4=0, b3=1, b2=0
Byte 2: b4=0, b3=1, b2=1
Byte 2: b4=1, b3=0, b2=0
000 = No Hydronic Valves
001 = 2-Pipe Heating Only
010 = 2-Pipe Cooling Only
011 = 2-Pipe Heat & Cool Changeover
100 = 4-Pipe Hydronic Heat & Cool
Fan Speed Selection
Byte 2: b6=0, b5=0
Byte 2: b6=0, b5=1
Byte 2: b6=1, b5=0
00 = 1Speed (Uses: High)
01 = 2Speed (Uses: Low, High)
10 = 3Speed (Uses: Low, Med, High)
Freeze Fault Detect Binary Input Selection
Byte 2: b7
0 = Disable Binary Input
1 = Enable Binary Input
Emergency Shutdown Binary Input Selection
Byte 3: b0
0 = Disable Binary Input
1 = Enable Binary Input
Dirty Air Filter* Binary Input Selection
Byte 3: b1
0 = Disable Binary Input
1 = Enable Binary Input
Electric Heat Selection
*Currently functions based on user-adjustable timer
www .DaikinApplied .com
23
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3143
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx B
appendIx B
MicroTech Unit Controller with an optional lonWorks® Communication Module
For installation and operation information on LonWorks
Communication Module and other ancillary control
components, see:
• IM 1012 — MicroTech III Fan Coil LonWorks
Communication Module .
• IM 933 — LonMaker Integration Plug-in Tool: For use with
the MicroTech III Unit Controller .
• IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor Installation
and Maintenance Manual
Each Daikin ThinLine fan coil can be equipped with a
LonWorks communication module that is
LonMark 3.4 certified to meet the LonMark
Space Comfort Control (SCC) profile for
fan coils . The controller is microprocessorbased and is designed to communicate
over a LonWorks network with the optional
factory or field-installed communication module.
The unit controller is programmed and tested with all the
logic required to monitor and control the unit . An optional wall
sensor may be used with the communication module to provide
limited local control of the Fan Coil or Cabinet Unit Heater unit .
The unit controller monitors water and air temperatures and
passes information to the communication module . The module
communicates with the BAS to provide network control of the
Fan Coil or Cabinet Unit Heater unit .
Figure 7: LonWorks Communication Module
The MicroTech unit controller with communication module
includes a unit-mounted discharge air and entering water
temperature sensors . Entering air temperature can be
monitored either by selecting either unit-mounted return air
temperature or wall- mounted room temperature sensors .
Room sensor options includes one with a setpoint adjustment,
unit mode, fan speed, and tenant override . See actual sensor
to make sure these options are present .
MicroTech Unit Controller with LonWorks Communication
Module orchestrates the following unit operations:
• Enable heating and cooling to maintain setpoint based on
a room sensor
• Monitors all equipment protection controls
• Monitors room and discharge air temperatures
• Monitors outside air temperature for units with
economizer option
• Relays status of all vital unit functions
The MicroTech unit controller with an optional communication
module should include:
• Return Air Temperature sensor (RAT) (factory- or fieldmounted)
• Discharge Air Temperature sensor (DAT) (factory- or fieldmounted)
• Entering Water Temperature sensor (EWT) (factory- or
field-mounted)
NOTE: Refer to IM 956 for details to install (RAT) & (DAT)
WARNING
When an optional wall-mounted room temperature
sensor is connected to the unit controller, the Return
Air Temperature (RAT) sensor must not be installed .
A wall-mounted room temperature sensor and the
return air temperature sensor must not be connected
simultaneously or the unit will not operate properly .
The communication module provides access to setpoints for
operational control
Available wall sensors include:
• Room sensor with LED status and tenant override button
• Room sensor with LCD display, fan speed selection
switch, tenant override button, and ±5°F setpoint
adjustment
• Room sensor with LCD display, fan speed selection
switch, tenant override button, 55° to 95°F setpoint
adjustment
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
144
24
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx c
appendIx c
MicroTech Unit Controller with an optional BACnet® Communication Module
MicroTech Unit Controller with BACnet MS/TP Communication
Module orchestrates the following unit operations:
For installation and operation information on MicroTech unit
controller and other ancillary components, see:
• IM 1013 — MicroTech Fan Coil BACnet Communication
Module
• Enable heating and cooling to maintain setpoint based on
a room sensor
• IM 1171 — Digitally Adjustable Display Sensor Installation
and Maintenance Manual
• Monitors all equipment protection controls
Daikin ThinLine fan coils and cabinet unit heaters are available
with an optional BACnet MS/
TP communication module that
is designed to communicate
over a BACnet MS/TP
communications network to a building automation system
(BAS). It can be factory or field-installed.
The module makes operational data and commands available
on a communications network using BACnet objects and
properties:
• Monitors room and discharge air temperatures
• Monitors outside air temperature for units with
economizer option
• Relays status of all vital unit functions
The MicroTech unit controller with an optional communication
module should include:
• Return Air Temperature sensor (RAT) (factory- or fieldmounted)
• Discharge Air Temperature sensor (DAT) (factory- or fieldmounted)
• Entering Water Temperature sensor (EWT) (factory- or
field-mounted)
NOTE: Refer to IM 956 for details to install (RAT) & (DAT)
• The network cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable
• Network communications run up to 76 .8 Kbps
• DIP switches on the controller enable the MS/TP MAC
address to be set in the range 0-127
WARNING
• Four green status LEDs on the communication
module indicate communication activity on the MS/TP
communication network and with the unit controller
When an optional wall-mounted room temperature
sensor is connected to the unit controller, the Return
Air Temperature (RAT) sensor must not be installed .
A wall-mounted room temperature sensor and the
return air temperature sensor must not be connected
simultaneously or the unit will not operate properly .
Figure 8: MicroTech BACnet MS/TP Snap-in
Communication Module
The communication module provides access to setpoints for
operational control
Available wall sensors include:
• Room sensor with LED status and tenant override button
• Room sensor with LCD display, fan speed selection
switch, tenant override button, and ±5°F setpoint
adjustment
• Roomsensor with LCD display, fan speed selection
switch, tenant override button, 55° to 95°F setpoint
adjustment
The unit controller is programmed and tested with all the logic
required to monitor and control the unit . An optional wall sensor
may be used with the communication module to provide limited
local control of the fan coils and cabinet unit heater unit . Room
sensor options include one with a setpoint adjustment, unit
mode, fan speed, and tenant override . See actual sensor to
make sure these options are present .
The unit controller monitors water and air temperatures and
passes information to the communication module . The module
communicates with the BAS, to provide network control of the
fan coils and cabinet unit heater unit .
www .DaikinApplied .com
25
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3145
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
appendIx d
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Figure 9: 1 PSC Motor, No Electric Heat, 2 Position Actuators, 2 Position Valves – Page 1
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
146
26
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
Figure 10: 1 PSC Motor, No Electric Heat, 2 Position Actuators, 2 Position Valves – Page 2
www .DaikinApplied .com
27
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3147
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
Figure 11: 1 PSC Motor, No Electric Heat, Valve1 FLT, No Return Air Temperature – Page 1
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
148
28
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
Figure 12: 1 PSC Motor, No Electric Heat, Valve1 FLT, No Return Air Temperature – Page 2
www .DaikinApplied .com
29
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3149
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
Figure 13: ECM Motor, Electric Heat, 230V, Economizer – Page 1
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
150
30
www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum OM 1111
appendIx d
Figure 14: ECM Motor, Electric Heat, 230V, Economizer – Page 2
www .DaikinApplied .com
31
OM 1111-2 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
IM IM 1152-3151
Addendum OM 1111
Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
OM 1111-2 (10/15)
152
©2015 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www .DaikinApplied .com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum—ED 19059
Sales and Engineering Data
ED 19059-2
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: ED 19059
Date: October 2015
ThinLine and Large Cap Fan Coils
ECM Speed Adjustment Board
(EVO Board)
Overview
The constant CFM ECM when wired to with the ECM speed
adjustment board (EVO Board) allows the user the manually
adjust the airflow for each of the three fan speeds by turning
a dial. Each speed may be adjusted across the full RPM
range of the motor and once set the new flow rate will then be
maintained by the motor despite changes to the system static
pressure. The CFM for each speed setting may be determined
by measuring the airflow in the system or by measuring the DC
voltage between the adjusted terminal and the reference point
on the board. If desired, the motor may be used without speed
adjustment by replacing the wire harness from the EVO board
with the standard wire harness. In this case the motor will run
at the factory programmed flow rates.
IM IM 1152-3153
Addendum—ED 19059
Overview
Overview
Connecting the Unit to Field Power
Line voltage power wires L1 and Com are connected to S2
as shown. A factory provided step down transformer provides
24VAC power for the ECM control and the EVO board and the
factory provided 16 pin wire harness connects the EVO board
to the ECM (Figure 7 and Figure 8).
Connecting the Unit to a 24V Thermostat
or Controller
The factory provided 24VAC transformer should be used to
provide power for the field mounted t-stat by connecting the
24V input to TB2 terminal B and the common to TB2 terminal
E. The three t-stat fan speed outputs are connected to the EVO
board spade terminals labeled Flo1, Flo2 and Flo3 (Figure 1).
When a t-stat fan speed output is energized, the fan will run
at the speed set at the corresponding flow dial until the speed
output is de-energized.
Figure 1: EVO Board Key Components and Locations
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
154
2
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum—ED 19059
wiring
wiring
Adjusting Fan Speed
Bypassing the EVO board
The fan will run at the factory set flow rates when the unit is
installed. If different flow rate is required, turn the flow dial
(Figure 1) corresponding to the Flo terminal until the desired
CFM is achieved or the measured DC reference voltage
between the com port and corresponding flo port equals the
correct value from Table 2 through Table 13 on page 8.
If the EVO board should fail or if it is not needed, the EVO
board may be bypassed allowing the ECM to operate at the
factory programmed fixed flow rates. To bypass the EVO board
unplug the 16 pin EVO board wire harness (Figure 3) from the
ECM and the board and remove it from the unit. Locate the
standard 16 pin wire harness (included in the unit paper work
packet) and plug it into the motor. The individual wires on the
other end of the harness connect wire 78 (blue) to terminal
C on terminal block TB2 and wire 73 (green) to terminal D
on terminal block TB2. Connect the five fan speed wires, 77,
74, 75, 76, and 80 to terminals HI+, HI-, MED, LO+ and LOrespectively on terminal block TB4. Connect the field mounted
t-stat 24V+ and common to terminals B and E, respectively, on
terminal block TB2. Apply 24V to any of the five speed inputs on
TB4 to run motor at that speed
For example, if terminal Flo1 is on and the Flo1 dial is turned
until the Flo1 reference voltage = 2.5, then the motor will run
at the CFM that corresponds to 2.5V.
NOTE: The Flo0 dial should always be set at 0V to prevent
the fan from running when all speed outputs are OFF.
Figure 2: Typical EVO Board Wiring for a Single Motor Large Cap Unit
www.DaikinApplied.com
3
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
IM IM 1152-3155
Addendum—ED 19059
wiring
Figure 3: Single Motor EVO Board Bypass Wiring Detail for Large Cap Unit
Figure 4: Two Motor EVO Board Bypass Wiring Detail for Large Cap Unit
Table 1: Large Cap Wiring Schematics
Drawing Number Description
910116769
ECM with 3 speed control, 115V, 1 Motor
910167425
ECM with 3 speed control, 115V, 2 Motors
910167454
ECM with 3 speed control, 208-230V, 1 Motor
910167432
ECM with 3 speed control, 208-230V, 2 Motors
910167455
ECM with 3 speed control, 265-277V, 1 Motor
910167433
ECM with 3 speed control, 265-277V, 2 Motors
910165943
ECM with EVO Board, 115V, 1 Motor
910166611
ECM with EVO Board, 115V, 2 Motors
910165944
ECM with EVO Board, 208-230V, 1 Motor
910166613
ECM with EVO Board, 208-230V, 2 Motors
910165945
ECM with EVO Board, 265-277V, 2 Motors
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
156
4
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum—ED 19059
wiring
Figure 5: Single Motor EVO Board Bypass Wiring Detail for ThinLine Unit
Figure 6: Two Motor EVO Board Bypass Wiring Detail for ThinLine Unit
www.DaikinApplied.com
5
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
IM IM 1152-3157
Addendum—ED 19059
wiring
Figure 7: Standard 16 pin Wire Harness Detail
Figure 8: EVO Board 16 Pin Wire Harness Detail
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
158
6
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum—ED 19059
reference vOltage tables
Table 2: Size 6 Voltage Table–Large Cap
Coil
Configuration
3
3+2
6
6+2
Speed
Set Voltage*
(VDC)
RPM*
CFM*
High
3.6
1033
591
Medium
2.2
916
462
Low
0.7
806
High
3.8
Medium
Low
Coil
Configuration
Speed
Set Voltage*
(VDC)
RPM*
CFM*
High
3.6
1076
1595
Medium
2.1
921
1192
305
Low
0.575
788
727
1184
596
High
3.6
1231
1591
2.25
1040
470
Medium
2.1
1047
1195
0.75
881
293
Low
0.575
851
715
High
3.75
1236
598
High
3.42
1333
1593
Medium
2.2
1058
450
Medium
2.1
1108
1209
Low
0.7
885
306
Low
0.575
893
728
High
3.75
1369
590
High
3.42
1473
1594
Medium
2.2
1158
447
Medium
2.1
1227
1202
Low
0.7
946
312
Low
0.575
956
727
3
3+2
6
6+2
* These values are all approximates and not exact
* These values are all approximates and not exact
Table 3: Size 8 Voltage Table–Large Cap
Coil
Configuration
3
3+2
6
6+2
reference vOltage tables
Table 5: Size 16 Voltage Table–Large Cap
Table 6: Size 20 Voltage Table–Large Cap
Speed
Set Voltage*
(VDC)
RPM*
CFM*
High
3.6
1068
797
Medium
2.2
943
623
Low
0.7
813
High
3.65
Medium
Low
High
Coil
Configuration
Speed
Set Voltage*
(VDC)
RPM*
CFM*
High
3.7
1114
1790
Medium
2.65
1011
1488
446
Low
0.7
923
800
1206
799
High
3.6
1226
1814
2.2
1050
625
Medium
2.6
1148
1499
0.75
888
447
Low
0.73
974
794
3.65
1304
796
High
4.4
1370
1810
Medium
2.2
1113
626
Medium
3.35
1220
1502
Low
0.75
933
453
Low
0.3
1066
805
High
3.7
1400
798
High
MAX VDC**
1423
1620
Medium
2.25
1202
626
Medium
3.4
1292
1492
Low
0.8
988
440
Low
0.55
1108
806
3
3+2
6
6+2
* These values are all approximates and not exact
* These values are all approximates and not exact
** MAX VDC is referring to the dial being turned to its MAXIMUM voltage output
Table 4: Size 12 Voltage Table–Large Cap
Coil
Configuration
3
3+2
6
6+2
Speed
Set Voltage*
(VDC)
RPM*
CFM*
High
3.55
1160
1084
Medium
1.94
993
800
Low
0.37
909
503
High
3.71
1282
1082
Medium
2.0
1105
799
Low
0.41
996
501
High
3.55
1406
1078
Medium
1.975
1164
802
Low
0.37
1037
500
High
3.95
1512
1074
Medium
2.03
1240
801
Low
0.4
1104
498
* These values are all approximates and not exact
www.DaikinApplied.com
7
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
IM IM 1152-3159
Addendum—ED 19059
reference vOltage tables
Table 7: Size 2 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Table 11: Size 8 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
LOW
1.31 VDC
158 @ 0ʺ WC
LOW
0.89 VDC
410 @ 0ʺ WC
MED
1.95 VDC
228 @ 0ʺ WC
MED
2.77 VDC
627 @ 0ʺ WC
HIGH
2.16 VDC
308 @ 0ʺ WC
HIGH
4.95 VDC
825 @ 0ʺ WC
Table 8: Size 3 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Table 12: Size 10 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
LOW
1.53 VDC
177 @ 0ʺ WC
LOW
0.50 VDC
551 @ 0.05ʺ WC
MED
2.11 VDC
265 @ 0ʺ WC
MED
2.55 VDC
825 @ 0ʺ WC
HIGH
2.77 VDC
352 @ 0ʺ WC
HIGH
4.40 VDC
1105 @ 0ʺ WC
Table 9: Size 4 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Table 13: Size 12 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
LOW
1.74 VDC
228 @ 0.05ʺ WC
LOW
0.47 VDC
719 @ 0ʺ WC
MED
2.46 VDC
337 @ 0.05ʺ WC
MED
2.50 VDC
1010 @ 0ʺ WC
HIGH
3.20 VDC
452 @ 0.05ʺ WC
HIGH
4.60 VDC
1344 @ 0ʺ WC
* These values are all approximates and based on testing with
the 3 row coil.
Table 10: Size 6 Voltage Table–ThinLine
Speed
Voltage*
CFM*
LOW
1.40 VDC
340 @ 0.1ʺ WC
MED
2.1 VDC
522 @ 0.1ʺ WC
HIGH
2.75 VDC
711 @ 0.1ʺ WC
ED 19059-2 • EVO CONTROL BOARD
160
** MAX VDC is referring to the dial being turned to its
MAXIMUM voltage output.
8
www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3
Addendum—ED 19059
Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
ED 19059-2 (10/15)
©2015 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
IM IM 1152-3161
Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. Refer to Form
933-430285Y. To find your local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
IM 1152-3 (05/16)
©2016 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com